a-class · 2019-08-28 · your vehicle. for your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the...
TRANSCRIPT
A-ClassOwner's Manual
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
SymbolsIn this Owner's Manual, you will find the fol-lowing symbols:
G WARNINGWarning notices draw your attention to haz-ards that may endanger your health or life, orthe health or life of others.
H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.
i This symbol indicates useful instructionsor further information that could be helpfulto you.
X This symbol designates an instruc-tion you must follow.
X Several consecutive symbols indi-cate an instruction with severalsteps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find further information on atopic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.
Display This text indicates a message onthe multifunction/COMAND dis-play.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.
Thank you for choosing Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read this Owner'sManual carefully and familiarise yourself withyour vehicle. For your own safety and a longervehicle life, follow the instructions and warn-ing notices in this manual. Disregarding themmay lead to damage to the vehicle or personalinjury.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may vary according to:RmodelRorderRcountry variantRavailabilityThe illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-cles, the layout of components and controlsdiffers accordingly.Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating itsvehicles to the state of the art.Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROwner's ManualRService BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.
i You can get to know the important fea-tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-er's Manual on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung
You can also use the A-Class Guide smart-phone App:
Apple® iOS
Android™
The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.
1765841400Z102 É1765841400Z102iËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 21
At a glance ........................................... 27
Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 73
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 91
Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 103
Climate control ................................. 121
Driving and parking .......................... 141
On-board computer and displays .... 207
Stowing and features ....................... 267
Maintenance and care ...................... 283
Breakdown assistance ..................... 297
Wheels and tyres .............................. 317
Technical data ................................... 335
Contents 3
1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket
see Socket 4ETS
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)
4MATIC (permanent all-wheeldrive)
Display message ............................ 2544MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 182
AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 230Function/notes ................................ 61Important safety notes .................... 61Warning lamp ................................. 258
Activating/deactivating air-recir-culation mode .................................... 132Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 126Active light function ......................... 109Active Park Assist
Display message ............................ 248Active Parking Assist
Cancelling ...................................... 190Detecting parking spaces .............. 187Exiting a parking space .................. 189Function/notes ............................. 187Important safety notes .................. 186Parking .......................................... 188Towing a trailer .............................. 190
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 69Adaptive Brake Assist
Display message ............................ 237Function/notes ................................ 64
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 65Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 243Function/notes ............................. 110
Adaptive Main-beam AssistSwitching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 222
Additional speedometer ................... 220Additives (engine oil) ........................ 344
Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 107Airbags
Front airbag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 43Important safety guidelines ............. 42Kneebag ........................................... 44Sidebag ............................................ 44Triggering ......................................... 41Windowbag ...................................... 45
Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control
Air filter (white display message) .... 245Air vents
Important safety notes .................. 139Rear ............................................... 140Setting ........................................... 139Setting the centre air vents ........... 139Setting the side air vents ............... 140see Climate control
Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 222
AMGMenu (on-board computer) ............ 226Performance Seat ............................ 97
Anti-glare film .................................... 281Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 167Ashtray ............................................... 277Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 217Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 217ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 290Hiding a service message .............. 289Notes ............................................. 289Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 290Service message ............................ 289Special service requirements ......... 290
4 Index
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 69
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Function ........................................... 69Interior motion sensor ..................... 70Switching off the alarm .................... 69Tow-away protection ........................ 70
ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 219Display message ............................ 245Function/notes ............................. 195
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 214AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 242see Lights
Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 147Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 146Automatic headlamp mode .............. 105Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 154Automatic drive program ............... 156Changing gear ............................... 154DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 151Display message ............................ 252Drive program display .................... 152Driving tips .................................... 154Emergency running mode .............. 159Engaging drive position .................. 153Engaging neutral ............................ 153Engaging park position (AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 153Engaging reverse gear ................... 153Engaging the park position ............ 152Holding the vehicle stationary onuphill gradients .............................. 154Kickdown ....................................... 154Manual drive program .................... 156Overview ........................................ 151Problem (fault) ............................... 159Program selector button ................ 155Pulling away ................................... 144Selector lever ................................ 153Starting the engine ........................ 144Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 156Trailer towing ................................. 155
Transmission position display 152, 153Transmission positions .................. 153
Automatic transmission emer-gency running mode ......................... 159Auxiliary heating
Activating/deactivating ................. 134Activating/deactivating (on thecentre console) .............................. 135Display message ............................ 255Important safety notes .................. 134Problem (display message) ............ 138Remote control .............................. 135Setting ........................................... 224Setting the departure time ............. 136
Auxiliary ventilationActivating/deactivating ................. 134Activating/deactivating (on thecentre console) .............................. 135Problem (display message) ............ 138Remote control .............................. 135
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 349
BBag hook ............................................ 273Ball coupling
Folding in ....................................... 205Folding out ..................................... 203
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62Battery (key)
Checking .......................................... 76Important safety notes .................... 76Replacing ......................................... 76
Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 306Display message ............................ 244Important safety notes .................. 304Jump starting ................................. 308
Belt force limiterActivation ......................................... 49Function ........................................... 49
Belt tensionerActivation ......................................... 41Function ........................................... 49
Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 219Display message ............................ 247
Index 5
Notes/function .............................. 198Trailer towing ................................. 199
BonnetActive bonnet (pedestrian protec-tion) ............................................... 284Closing ........................................... 286Display message ............................ 254Important safety notes .................. 284Opening ......................................... 285
Bootsee Tailgate
Boot load (maximum) ........................ 346Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 236Notes ............................................. 344
Brake lampsAdaptive ........................................... 65Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 240
BrakesABS .................................................. 61Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64BAS .................................................. 62Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 344Display message ............................ 230Driving tips .................................... 166Important safety notes .................. 166Parking brake ................................ 163Warning lamp ................................. 258
Breakdownsee Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting
Bulbssee Replacing bulbs
CCalling up a fault
see Display messages Car
see Vehicle Care
Automatic car wash ....................... 291Carpets .......................................... 296Display ........................................... 295Exhaust pipe .................................. 294
Exterior lighting ............................. 293Gear or selector lever .................... 295High-pressure cleaner .................... 291Interior ........................................... 295Matt paintwork .............................. 292Notes ............................................. 290Paint .............................................. 292Plastic trim .................................... 295Reversing camera .......................... 294Roof lining ...................................... 296Seat belt ........................................ 296Seat cover ..................................... 296Sensors ......................................... 294Steering wheel ............................... 295Trim pieces .................................... 295Washing by hand ........................... 291Wheels ........................................... 292Windows ........................................ 293Wiper blades .................................. 293Wooden trim .................................. 295
Car wash (care) ................................. 291Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 223Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 75
Centre consoleLower section .................................. 35Upper section .................................. 34
Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 116Cornering light function ................. 115Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 114Main-beam headlamps ................... 114Rear foglamp ................................. 116Reversing lamps ............................ 116Tail lamps ...................................... 116Turn signals (front) ......................... 115Turn signals (rear) .......................... 116
Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 60Rear doors ....................................... 60
ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 50Restraint systems ............................ 50
Child seatAutomatic recognition ..................... 52ISOFIX .............................................. 53On the front-passenger seat ............ 51
6 Index
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 56Recommendations ........................... 58Suitable positions ............................ 56Top Tether ....................................... 54
Cigarette lighter ................................ 278Cleaning
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 294Climate control
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 134Controlling automatically ............... 128Convenience opening/closing(air-recirculation mode) ................. 132Cooling with air dehumidification . . 126Demisting the windows .................. 130Demisting the windscreen ............. 130Important safety notes .................. 122Indicator lamp ................................ 128Notes on using THERMATIC auto-matic climate control ..................... 123Notes on using THERMOTRONICautomatic climate control .............. 125Overview of systems ...................... 122Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 128Problem with the rear windowheating .......................................... 132Setting the air distribution ............. 129Setting the airflow ......................... 129Setting the air vents ...................... 139Setting the temperature ................ 128Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 132Switching on/off ........................... 126Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133Switching the rear window heat-ing on/off ...................................... 131Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 129THERMATIC automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 123THERMOTRONIC (2-zone) auto-matic climate control ..................... 125
CockpitOverview .......................................... 28see Instrument cluster
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating the dis-tance warning function .................. 218Display message ............................ 230Operation/notes .............................. 62
COMAND Onlinesee separate operating instructions
Combination switch .......................... 107Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 211Convenience closing feature .............. 85Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ........................... 132Convenience opening feature ............ 85Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 288Display message ............................ 243Important safety notes .................. 344Temperature (on-board computer) . 226Temperature gauge ........................ 208Warning lamp ................................. 264
Coolingsee Climate control
Cornering lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 115
Cornering light functionDisplay message ............................ 239Function/notes ............................. 109
Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 112Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 169Cruise control lever ....................... 169Deactivating ................................... 170Display message ............................ 250Driving system ............................... 168Important safety notes .................. 168LIM indicator lamp ......................... 169Selecting ........................................ 169Setting a speed .............................. 170Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 169
Cup holderCentre console .............................. 276Important safety notes .................. 275Rear compartment ......................... 276
Index 7
DDashboard
see Instrument cluster Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting Data
see Technical data Daytime driving lights
Display message ............................ 242Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 221Switching on/off (switch) .............. 105
Dealershipsee Qualified specialist workshop
Declarations of conformity ................. 23Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 222Interior lighting .............................. 223
Diagnostics connection ...................... 23Diesel .................................................. 341Digital speedometer ......................... 212Dipped-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 114Display message ............................ 239Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) ........................................ 104Setting for driving on the right/left 221Switching on/off ........................... 105
DIRECT SELECT leversee Automatic transmission
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 295Display message
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 289General information ....................... 229Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 229
Display messagesCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 229Driving systems ............................. 245Engine ............................................ 243Key ................................................ 256Lights ............................................. 239Safety systems .............................. 230Tyres .............................................. 251Vehicle ........................................... 252
Distance recordersee Trip meter
Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 218Function/notes ................................ 62Warning lamp ................................. 266
DISTRONIC PLUSActivation conditions ..................... 175Cruise control lever ....................... 174Deactivating ................................... 177Display message ............................ 249Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 175Driving tips .................................... 178Function/notes ............................. 174Important safety notes .................. 173Selecting ........................................ 175Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 177Warning lamp ................................. 266
DoorAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 223Automatic locking (switch) ............... 81Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 75Control panel ................................... 37Display message ............................ 254Emergency locking ........................... 81Emergency unlocking ....................... 81Important safety notes .................... 79Opening (from the inside) ................ 80
Drive programAutomatic ...................................... 156Display ........................................... 153Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 152Manual ........................................... 156
Driver's doorsee Door
Driving abroadService24h .................................... 290Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 104
Driving on flooded roads .................. 167Driving safety system
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .. . . 62Distance warning function ............... 62Electronic Brake-force Distribution . . 69ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ......................................... 65, 66
8 Index
ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 65Important safety guidelines ............. 61
Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 69Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 65BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62Overview .......................................... 61Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL ................................................ 69
Driving systemActive Parking Assist ..................... 186
Driving systemsATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 195Blind Spot Assist ............................ 197Cruise control ................................ 168Display message ............................ 245Distronic Plus ................................ 173HOLD function ............................... 179Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 199Lane package ................................ 197PARKTRONIC ................................. 182RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 181Reversing camera .......................... 191Speed Limit Assist ......................... 196SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 171
Driving tipsAquaplaning ................................... 167Automatic transmission ................. 154Brakes ........................................... 166DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 178Downhill gradient ........................... 166Driving abroad ............................... 104Driving in winter ............................. 167Driving on flooded roads ................ 167Driving on wet roads ...................... 167General .......................................... 165Icy road surfaces ........................... 168Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 167New brake pads/linings ................ 167Running-in tips ............................... 142Snow chains .................................. 321Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 104Towing a trailer .............................. 201Wet road surface ........................... 166
DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 215
EEASY-VARIO-PLUS system
Luggage compartment enlarge-ment .............................................. 272
EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)
Display message ............................ 232Function/notes ................................ 69
ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 165On-board computer ....................... 212
ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 147Automatic engine switch-off .......... 146Deactivating/activating ................. 147General information ....................... 146Important safety notes .................. 146Introduction ................................... 145
Electrical fusessee Fuses
Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency keyUnlocking the driver's door .............. 81
Emergency key elementFunction/notes ................................ 75Locking vehicle ................................ 81
Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 81
Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 332Important safety notes .................. 332Removing ....................................... 332Technical data ............................... 333
Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 83Vehicle ............................................. 81
EngineDisplay message ............................ 243ECO start/stop function ................ 145Engine number ............................... 338Jump-starting ................................. 308Running irregularly ......................... 149Starting problems .......................... 149Starting the engine with the key .... 144Stopping ........................................ 162
Index 9
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 314Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) 264
Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 336Problem (fault) ............................... 149
Engine oilAdditives ........................................ 344Checking the oil level ..................... 286Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 287Display message ............................ 245Filling capacity ............................... 343Notes about oil grades ................... 343Notes on oil level/consumption .... 286Temperature (on-board computer) . 226Topping up ..................................... 287Viscosity ........................................ 344
Environmental protectionReturning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 21
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 226Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 66Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 218Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 68Display message ............................ 230ETS/4ETS ........................................ 65Function/notes ......................... 65, 66Important safety guidelines ............. 65Trailer stabilisation .......................... 68Warning lamp ................................. 260
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 65Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 294Exterior lighting
Settings options ............................. 105see Lights
Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 99Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 100Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 100Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 99Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 225Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 100
Parking position ............................. 100Resetting ......................................... 99Storing settings (memory function) 101
FFault message
see Display messages Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 299First-aid kit ......................................... 298Fitting a wheel
Removing a wheel .......................... 328Fitting wheels
Fitting a wheel ............................... 328Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329Preparing the vehicle ..................... 325Raising the vehicle ......................... 326Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 325
Flat tyreMOExtended tyres ......................... 300Preparing the vehicle ..................... 300TIREFIT kit ...................................... 301see Emergency spare wheel
Floormat ............................................. 281Foglamps
Extended range .............................. 109Switching on/off ........................... 106
FrequenciesMobile phone ................................. 336Two-way radio ................................ 336
Front foglampsDisplay message ............................ 241
FuelAdditives ........................................ 341Consumption information .............. 342Consumption statistics .................. 211Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 212Displaying the range ...................... 212Fuel gauge ....................................... 30Grade (petrol) ................................ 340Important safety notes .................. 339Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 340Problem (malfunction) ................... 161Quality (diesel) ............................... 341
10 Index
Refuelling ....................................... 159Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 339
Fuel filler flapOpening/closing ............................ 160
Fuel filter (white display message) . 245Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Gauge .............................................. 30
Fuel reservesee Fuel
Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 339Problem (malfunction) ................... 161
FusesAllocation chart ............................. 315Before changing ............................. 314Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 315Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 315Important safety notes .................. 314
GGear indicator (on-board computer) 226Gear or selector lever (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 295Gearshift program
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 226Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 21Glove compartment .......................... 269
HHandbrake
see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 108
Display message ............................ 256Headlamp
Cleaning system (function) ............ 108Cleaning system (notes) ................ 345
HeadlampsMisting up ...................................... 111Topping up the cleaning system .... 289see Automatic headlamp mode
Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 94Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 95Adjusting (manually) ........................ 95Adjusting (rear) ................................ 96Fitting/removing (rear) .................... 96
Heatingsee Climate control
High-pressure cleaners .................... 291Hill start assist .................................. 145HOLD function
Deactivating ................................... 180Display message ............................ 246Function/notes ............................. 180
IIgnition lock
see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 69Indicator and warning lamps
Coolant .......................................... 264DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 266Engine diagnostics ......................... 264SPORT handling mode ................... 261
Indicator lampsDisplay message ............................ 240see Warning and indicator lamps
Inspectionsee ASSYST PLUS
Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 30Settings ......................................... 220Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 208Intelligent Light System
Activating/deactivating ................. 221Display message ............................ 242Overview ........................................ 108Setting the dipped-beam head-lamps for driving on the right/left . 221
Interior lighting ................................. 111Automatic control system .............. 111Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 223Emergency lighting ........................ 112Manual control ............................... 112Overview ........................................ 111
Index 11
Reading lamp ................................. 111Setting the ambient lightingbrightness (on-board computer) .... 222
Interior motion sensor ........................ 70ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 53
JJack
Storage location ............................ 299Using ............................................. 326
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 308
KKey
Changing the battery ....................... 76Checking the battery ....................... 76Convenience closing feature ............ 85Convenience opening feature .......... 85Display message ............................ 256Door central locking/unlocking ....... 75Emergency key element ................... 75Important safety notes .................... 74Loss ................................................. 78Modifying the programming ............. 75Positions (ignition lock) ................. 143Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78Starting the engine ........................ 144
Key positions (ignition lock) ............ 143Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 154Manual drive program .................... 158
Kneebag ............................................... 44
LLamps
see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 219Display message ............................ 247Function/information .................... 199
Lane package ..................................... 197Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 226Lashing eyelets ................................. 273Licence plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 241
Lightingsee Lights
LightsActivating/deactivating the Intel-ligent Light System ........................ 221Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 223Active light function ....................... 109Automatic headlamp mode ............ 105Cornering light function ................. 109Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 105Display message ............................ 239Driving abroad ............................... 104Foglamps ....................................... 106Foglamps (extended range) ........... 109Hazard warning lamps ................... 108Headlamp flasher ........................... 108Headlamp range ............................ 107Light switch ................................... 105Main-beam headlamps ................... 107Motorway mode ............................. 109Parking lamps ................................ 106Rear foglamp ................................. 106Setting the ambient lightingbrightness (on-board computer) .... 222Side lamps ..................................... 106Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 222Switching the daytime drivinglights on/off (on-board computer) . 221Switching the daytime drivinglights on/off (switch) ..................... 105Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 222Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 222Turn signals ................................... 107see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs
Light sensor (display message) ....... 242LIM indicator lamp
Cruise control ................................ 169DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 171
Limiting the speedsee SPEEDTRONIC
Loading guidelines ............................ 268
12 Index
Lockingsee Central locking
Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 81Emergency locking ........................... 81From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 80
Locking centrallysee Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 223Luggage compartment enlargement 272
Important safety notes .................. 272Luggage compartment floor
Important safety notes .................. 274opening/closing ............................ 274stowage well, under ....................... 274
Luggage net ....................................... 271Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 96
MM+S tyres ........................................... 320Main-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 114Display message ............................ 241Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 110Switching on/off ........................... 107
Maintenancesee ASSYST PLUS
Manual transmissionEngaging reverse gear ................... 151Gear lever ...................................... 150Pulling away ................................... 144Shifting to neutral .......................... 151Shift recommendation ................... 151Starting the engine ........................ 144
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 292Memory card (audio) ......................... 215Memory function ............................... 101Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 229
Messagessee Display messages
Mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in sun visor)
Mirrorssee Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror
Mobile phoneFrequencies ................................... 336Installation ..................................... 336Menu (on-board computer) ............ 215Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 279Transmission output (maximum) .... 336
Mobile telephonePre-installed bracket ...................... 281
Modifying the programming (key) ..... 75MOExtended tyres ............................. 300Motorway mode ................................ 109MP3
Operating ....................................... 215see Separate operating instructions
Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 210Permanent display ......................... 220
Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 209Overview .......................................... 33
NNavigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 213see separate operating instructions
Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 142
OOccupant safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50Important safety notes .................... 40
Odometer ........................................... 211see Total distance recorder see Trip meter
Oilsee Engine oil
On-board computerAMG menu ..................................... 226Assistance menu ........................... 217
Index 13
Audio menu ................................... 214Convenience submenu .................. 225Displaying a service message ........ 290Display messages .......................... 229Factory setting submenu ............... 225Heating submenu ........................... 224Important safety notes .................. 208Instrument cluster submenu .......... 220Light submenu ............................... 221Menu overview .............................. 211Message memory .......................... 229Navigation menu ............................ 213Operating the TV ............................ 215Operating video DVD ..................... 215Operation ....................................... 209RACETIMER ................................... 226Service menu ................................. 219Settings menu ............................... 220Standard display ............................ 211Telephone menu ............................ 215Trip menu ...................................... 211Vehicle submenu ........................... 223
Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 115Operating system
see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 209Overhead control panel ...................... 36Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 61
PPaint code .......................................... 338Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 292Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety information ........... 86Opening/closing .............................. 87Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ................................................. 89Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Rain closing feature ......................... 88Resetting ......................................... 89
Parking ............................................... 162Important safety notes .................. 162Parking brake ................................ 163
Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 100Reversing camera .......................... 191see Active Parking Assist see PARKTRONIC
Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 186see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC
Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 233Electric parking brake .................... 163Warning lamp ................................. 263
Parking lampsDisplay message ............................ 241Switching on/off ........................... 106
PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 185Driving system ............................... 182Function/notes ............................. 182Important safety notes .................. 182Problem (fault) ............................... 186Sensor range ................................. 183Trailer towing ................................. 185Warning display ............................. 184
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warninglamp ...................................................... 52Petrol .................................................. 340Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 295Power windows
see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupantsafety system)
Display message ............................ 236Operation ......................................... 45
Program selector button .................. 155Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 21Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 144Manual transmission ...................... 144Trailer ............................................ 145
QQualified specialist workshop ........... 24
14 Index
RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 181RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 226Radar sensor system
Activating/deactivating ................. 223Country overview ........................... 350Display message ............................ 246
RadioSelecting a station ......................... 214see separate operating instructions
Rain closing feature (panoramasliding sunroof) ................................... 88Reading lamp ..................................... 111Rear bench seat
Folding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 272
Rear compartmentSetting the air vents ...................... 140
Rear-compartment seat belt sta-tus indicator ........................................ 49Rear foglamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 241Switching on/off ........................... 106
Rear lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 116see Lights
Rear shelf ........................................... 273Rear-view mirror
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 100Dipping (manual) .............................. 98
Rear window heatingProblem (fault) ............................... 132Switching on/off ........................... 131
Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 119Switching on/off ........................... 118
RefuellingFuel gauge ....................................... 30Important safety notes .................. 159Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 340Refuelling process ......................... 160see Fuel
Remote controlAuxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 135Changing the batteries (auxiliaryheating) ......................................... 136
Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 112Overview of bulb types .................. 113Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 113
Replacing the battery (auxiliaryheating remote control) .................... 136Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 245Warning lamp ................................. 264
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133Restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)
Rev counter ........................................ 208Reverse gear
Engaging (manual transmission) .... 151Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 153Reversing camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 294Function/notes ............................. 191Switching on/off ........................... 191
Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 87Roller sunblinds ............................... 88Side windows ................................... 84
Reversing lampChanging bulbs .............................. 116
Reversing lampsDisplay message ............................ 241
Roller sunblindOpening/closing .............................. 89Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 88
Roof carrier ........................................ 275Roof lining and carpets (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 296Roof load (maximum) ........................ 346Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 213
Index 15
SSafety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50Child restraint systems .................... 50
Safety systemsee Driving safety system
SeatAdjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 97Folding the backrest (rear com-partment) forwards/back .............. 272
Seat beltAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 47Adjusting the height ......................... 48Belt force limiter .............................. 49Belt tensioner .................................. 49Cleaning ......................................... 296Display message ............................ 237Fastening ......................................... 47Important safety guidelines ............. 46Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 49Releasing ......................................... 48Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 225Warning lamp ................................. 257Warning lamp (function) ................... 48
SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 94Adjusting (manually) ........................ 94Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 96Adjusting the head restraint ............ 94Cleaning the cover ......................... 296Correct driver's seat position ........... 92Important safety notes .................... 93Seat heating problem ...................... 97Storing settings (memory function) 101Switching seat heating on/off ......... 96
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 294Service
see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre
see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) . 219Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 344Coolant (engine) ............................ 344
Engine oil ....................................... 343Fuel ................................................ 339Important safety notes .................. 338Washer fluid ................................... 345
Service reportsee Qualified specialist workshop
SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 225On-board computer ....................... 220
Setting the air distribution ............... 129Setting the airflow ............................ 129SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 226Shifting to neutral (manual trans-mission) ............................................. 151Sidebag ................................................ 44Side lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 106Side windows
Convenience closing ........................ 85Convenience opening ...................... 85Important safety notes .................... 83Opening/closing .............................. 84Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86resetting .......................................... 85
Sliding sunroofsee Panorama sliding sunroof
Snow chains ...................................... 321Socket
Centre console .............................. 279Luggage compartment ................... 279Points to observe before use ......... 278Rear compartment ......................... 279
Specialist workshop ............................ 24Spectacles compartment ................. 269Speed, controlling
see Cruise control Speed Limit Assist
Activating/deactivating the warn-ing function .................................... 218Displaying ...................................... 218Display message ............................ 246Display message in the multifunc-tion display .................................... 197Function/notes ............................. 196Important safety notes .................. 196
16 Index
SpeedometerActivating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 220Digital ............................................ 212In the Instrument cluster ................. 30Segments ...................................... 209Selecting the unit of measurement 220see Instrument cluster
SPEEDTRONICDeactivating variable ..................... 172Display message ............................ 250Function/notes ............................. 171Important safety notes .................. 171LIM indicator lamp ......................... 171Permanent ..................................... 172Selecting ........................................ 171Storing the current speed .............. 172Variable ......................................... 171
SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 66Warning lamp ................................. 261
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem)
Display message ............................ 238Introduction ..................................... 41Warning lamp ................................. 263Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 143STEER CONTROL .................................. 69Steering (display message) .............. 255Steering wheel
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 209Cleaning ......................................... 295Gearshift paddles ........................... 156Important safety notes .................... 98
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 156Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 226Stowage areas ................................... 269Stowage compartment
Spectacles compartment ............... 269Stowage compartments
Armrest (front) ............................... 270Armrest (under) ............................. 270
Centre console .............................. 269Centre console (rear) ..................... 271Cup holder ..................................... 275Glove compartment ....................... 269Important safety information ......... 269Luggage net ................................... 271Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 270
Summer tyres .................................... 320Sun visor ............................................ 277Supplemental Restraint System
see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)
Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 222Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 69
TTailgate
Display message ............................ 254Emergency unlocking ....................... 83Important safety notes .................... 82Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 82Opening dimensions ...................... 346
Tail lampsDisplay message ............................ 241see Lights
Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 338Emergency spare wheel ................. 333Information .................................... 336Trailer loads ................................... 349Tyres/wheels ................................. 329Vehicle data ................................... 346
TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 216Display message ............................ 256Menu (on-board computer) ............ 215Number from the phone book ........ 216Redialling ....................................... 217Rejecting/ending a call ................. 216Telephone compartment ................ 270
TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 208Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 226Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 226
Index 17
Outside temperature ...................... 209Setting (climate control) ................ 128
TEMPOMATFunction/notes ............................. 168
Theft-deterrent systemATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69Immobiliser ...................................... 69
Through-loading ................................ 271Time
see Separate Owner's manual Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 226TIREFIT kit .......................................... 301Top Tether ............................................ 54Tow-away protection .......................... 70Towing
Important safety notes .................. 310Towing a trailer
Active Parking Assist ..................... 190Axle load, permissible .................... 349Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps 206ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 68Pulling away with a trailer .............. 145Trailer tow hitch display message .. 255
Towing awayFitting the towing eye .................... 311Removing the towing eye ............... 312With both axles on the ground ....... 312With front axle raised ..................... 312
Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 314Fitting the towing eye .................... 311Important safety notes .................. 310Removing the towing eye ............... 312
Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer
Trailer towing7-pin connector ............................. 206Blind Spot Assist ............................ 199Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 294Coupling up a trailer ...................... 204Decoupling a trailer ....................... 204Driving tips .................................... 201Folding in the ball coupling ............ 205Folding out the ball coupling .......... 203Important safety notes .................. 201Lights display message .................. 239Mounting dimensions .................... 348
Parktronic ...................................... 185Power supply ................................. 206Trailer loads ................................... 349
Transmissionsee Automatic transmission see Manual transmission
Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 152Transporting the vehicle .................. 313Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 295Trip computer (on-board computer) 211Trip meter
Calling up ....................................... 211Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 213
Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 115Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 116Switching on/off ........................... 107
TVOperating (on-board computer) ..... 215see Separate operating instructions
Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 336Installation ..................................... 336Transmission output (maximum) .... 336
Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate
Tyre pressureDisplay message ............................ 251Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 303Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 303Recommended ............................... 321
Tyre pressure loss warningImportant safety notes .................. 323Restarting ...................................... 323
TyresChanging a wheel .......................... 324Checking ........................................ 319Direction of rotation ...................... 324Display message ............................ 251Important safety notes .................. 318M+S tyres ...................................... 320MOExtended tyres ......................... 320Replacing ....................................... 324Service life ..................................... 319Storing ........................................... 324Summer tyres ........................ 168, 320
18 Index
Tyre size (data) .............................. 329Tyre tread ...................................... 319see Flat tyre
UUnladen weight ................................. 346Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 81From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 80
VVanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 277Variable SPEEDTRONIC
see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 24Data acquisition ............................... 25Electronics ..................................... 336Equipment ....................................... 22Implied warranty .............................. 24Individual settings .......................... 220Leaving parked up ......................... 164Locking (in an emergency) ............... 81Locking (key) ................................... 75Lowering ........................................ 329Pulling away ................................... 144Raising ........................................... 326Registration ..................................... 24Securing from rolling away ............ 325Towing away .................................. 310Tow-starting ................................... 310Transporting .................................. 313Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 81Unlocking (key) ................................ 75Vehicle data ................................... 346
Vehicle data ....................................... 346Vehicle dimensions ........................... 346Vehicle emergency locking ................ 81Vehicle identification number
see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 338Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle tool kit .................................. 299Vehicle weights ................................. 346
Video (DVD) ........................................ 215Video DVD (on-board computer) ...... 215VIN ...................................................... 338
WWarning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 258Brakes ........................................... 258Distance warning signal ................. 266ESP® .............................................. 260ESP® OFF ....................................... 261Fuel tank ........................................ 264LIM (cruise control) ........................ 169LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 174LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 171Overview .......................................... 32PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 52Reserve fuel ................................... 264Seat belt ........................................ 257SRS ................................................ 263
Warning triangle ................................ 298Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 256Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 329Wheel chock ...................................... 325Wheels
Changing/replacing ....................... 324Changing a wheel .......................... 324Checking ........................................ 319Cleaning ......................................... 292Cleaning (warning) ......................... 324Emergency spare wheel ................. 332Fitting a new wheel ........................ 328Fitting a wheel ............................... 325Important safety notes .................. 318Removing a wheel .......................... 328Storing ........................................... 324Tightening torque ........................... 329Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 329
WindowbagDisplay message ............................ 239Operation ......................................... 45
WindowsCleaning ......................................... 293see Side windows
WindscreenDemisting ...................................... 130
Index 19
Windscreen washer fluidsee Windscreen washer system
Windscreen washer systemNotes ............................................. 345Topping up ..................................... 289
Windscreen wipersDisplay message ............................ 256Problem (malfunction) ................... 120Rear window wiper ........................ 118Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118Switching on/off ........................... 117see Windscreen
Winter drivingGeneral notes ................................ 320
Winter operationSlippery road surfaces ................... 168Snow chains .................................. 321
Winter tyresLimiting the speed (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 223M+S tyres ...................................... 320
Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 293Important safety notes .................. 118Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 119Replacing (windscreen) .................. 118
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 295Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
ZZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 129
20 Index
Protection of the environment
General notes
H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.Our objectives are to use the natural resour-ces which form the basis of our existence onthis planet sparingly and in a manner whichtakes the requirements of both nature andhumanity into consideration.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally-responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tyre wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. Therefore,please bear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel
consumption.Robserve the correct tyre pressure.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the
vehicle.Rremove the roof rack once you no longer
need it.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Rall maintenance work should be carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Returning an end-of-life vehicleEU countries only:Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicleto dispose of it in an environmentally-respon-sible manner in accordance with the Euro-pean Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Direc-tive.There is a network of return points and dis-assembly plants available. You can returnyour vehicle to these plants free of charge.This makes a valuable contribution to therecycling process and the conservation ofresources.For further information on recycling old vehi-cles, recovery and the terms of the policy,visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. For these, the same war-ranty applies as for new parts.
! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as wellas control units and sensors for theserestraint systems, may be installed in thefollowing areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRdashboardRinstrument clusterRcentre console
Introduction 21
Z
Do not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have accessories retrofitted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
If you use parts, tyres and wheels as well asaccessories relevant to safety which have notbeen approved by Mercedes, the operatingsafety of the vehicle could be jeopardised.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Onlyuse genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tyres, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-version parts and accessories that have beenspecifically approved for your vehicle for theirreliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benzaccepts no responsibility for the use of suchparts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if theyhave been independently or officiallyapproved.In Germany, certain parts are only officiallyapproved for installation or modification ifthey comply with legal requirements. Thisalso applies to some other countries. All gen-uine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approvalrequirements. The use of non-approved partsmay invalidate the vehicle's general operatingpermit.This is the case:Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type
from that for which the vehicle's generaloperating permit was grantedRif other road users could be endangeredRif the emission or noise levels are adversely
affectedAlways specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) (Y page 338) and the engine num-ber (Y page 338) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.
Owner's Manual
General notesBefore you first drive off, read this Owner'sManual carefully and familiarise yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthis manual. Disregarding them may lead todamage to the vehicle or personal injury.
Vehicle equipmentThis Owner's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipmentavailable for your vehicle at the time of pub-lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Note that yourvehicle may not be fitted with all featuresdescribed. This is also the case for systemsand functions relevant to safety. Therefore,the equipment on your vehicle may differ fromthat in the descriptions and illustrations.The original purchase contract documenta-tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of thesystems in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet areimportant documents and should kept in thevehicle.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or necessary repairs car-ried out, this could result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as necessary repairs car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
22 Introduction
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring could effect theirfunction and/or the operation of other net-worked components. This could in particularalso be the case for systems relevant tosafety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operationalsafety of the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of an accident and injury.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.Always have work on electrical and electroniccomponents carried out at a qualified special-ist workshop.
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
kerb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
kerb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage or
parts of the chassis.In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody panelling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody panelling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system for an extended period, they cancatch fire.Have the vehicle checked and repaired imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop. Ifon continuing your journey you notice thatdriving safety is impaired, pull over and stopthe vehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Wireless vehicle componentsThe following information applies to all com-ponents of the vehicle and the COMAND sys-tem which receive and/or transmit radiowaves:The components of this vehicle which receiveand/or transmit radio waves are compliantwith the basic requirements and other rele-vant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Youcan obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Electromagnetic compatibilityThe electromagnetic compatibility of the vehi-cle components has been checked and certi-fied according to the currently valid versionof Directive 72/245/EEC or the equivalentECE Regulation ECE-R 10.
Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it can affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. This mayaffect the operating safety of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.
Introduction 23
Z
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Fit the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.
! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshopA qualified specialist workshop has the nec-essary special skills, tools and qualificationsto correctly carry out any necessary work onyour vehicle. This particularly applies to workrelevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Service Booklet.Always have the following work carried out ata qualified specialist workshop:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRmodifications, installations and conver-
sionsRwork on electronic componentsMercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Vehicle registrationMercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centresto carry out technical inspections on certainvehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicleis improved as a result of the inspection.Mercedes-Benz can only inform you aboutvehicle checks if it has your registration data.It is possible that your vehicle has not yetbeen registered in your name in the followingcases:Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an
authorised specialist dealer.Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined
at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.It is advisable to register your vehicle with aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possibleabout any change in address or vehicle own-ership.
Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognise certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe technical data in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Implied warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions are not covered either byMercedes-Benz implied warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
24 Introduction
Data stored in the vehicle
A number of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateReventsRfaultsThis technical information generally docu-ments the condition of a component, a mod-ule, a system or an environment.These are, for example:Roperating conditions of system compo-
nents. This includes, e.g. fluid levels.Rstatus messages from the vehicle and from
individual vehicle components. Thisincludes, e.g. number of wheel revolu-tions/speed, deceleration, lateral acceler-ation.Rmalfunctions and faults in important sys-
tem components. This includes, e.g. lights,brakes.Rreactions of the vehicle in special driving
situations. This includes, e.g. deploymentof an airbag, intervention of stability controlsystems.Renvironmental conditions. This includes,
e.g. the outside temperature.This data is exclusively technical in natureand is used to:Rassist in the detection and rectification of
faults and defectsRoptimise vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements over distances travelled.When your vehicle is serviced, this technicalinformation can be read out from the eventand fault memory.Services include:RrepairsRservice processes
Rwarranty claimsRquality assuranceThe information is read out by authorisedemployees of the service network (includingmanufacturers) using special diagnostic devi-ces. You can find more information there ifnecessary.After a fault has been rectified, the informa-tion in the fault memory is deleted or consec-utively overwritten.In normal vehicle operation, situations mayarise in which this technical data couldbecome personal in nature in conjunctionwith other information and, if necessary, onconsultation of an approval official.Examples include:Raccident reportsRvehicle damageRwitness testimoniesFurther additional features which are con-tractually agreed with the customer likewiseallow specific vehicle data to be obtainedfrom the vehicle. Such additional featuresinclude vehicle locating in an emergency, forexample.
Copyright information
General notesYou can find information on licences for freeand open-source software used in your vehi-cle and its electronic components on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Introduction 25
Z
26
Cockpit ................................................. 28Instrument cluster .............................. 30Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Centre console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 36Door control panel .............................. 37
27
At a
gla
nce
Cockpit
Function Page: Steering wheel gearshift
paddles 156
; Combination switch 107
= Instrument cluster 30
? Horn
A DIRECT SELECT lever 151
B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 182
C Overhead control panel 36
D Climate control systems 122
Function PageE Ignition lock 143
F Adjusting the steeringwheel 98
G Cruise control lever 169
H Electric parking brake 163
I Light switch 105
J Diagnostics connection 23
K Opening the bonnet 285
28 CockpitAt
a g
lanc
e
Function Page: Overhead control panel 36
; PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 182
= Combination switch 107
? Instrument cluster 30
A Horn
B DIRECT SELECT lever 151
C Steering wheel gearshiftpaddles 156
D Light switch 105
Function PageE Electric parking brake 163
F Opening the bonnet 285
G Diagnostics connection 23
H Ignition lock 143
I Adjusting the steeringwheel 98
J Cruise control lever 169
K Climate control systems 122
Cockpit 29
At a
gla
nce
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
i Instrument cluster: kilometres
Function Page: Speedometer with seg-
ments 209
; Multifunction display 210
= Rev counter 208
Function Page? Coolant temperature 208
A Fuel gauge
B Instrument cluster lighting 208
30 Instrument clusterAt
a g
lanc
e
i Instrument cluster: miles
Function Page: Speedometer with seg-
ments 209
; Multifunction display 210
= Rev counter 208
Function Page? Coolant temperature 208
A Fuel gauge
B Instrument cluster lighting 208
Instrument cluster 31
At a
gla
nce
Warning and indicator lamps
Function Page: L Dipped-beam head-
lamps 105
; T Side lamps 106
= K Main-beam head-lamps 107
? ÷ ESP® 260
A ! Electric parking brake(red) 263
B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 263
C · Distance warning 266
D #! Turn signals 107
E 6 SRS 263
F ü Seat belts 257
G % Diesel engine: pre-glow 144M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 261
Function PageH ? Coolant 264
I R Rear foglamp 106
J N Front foglamps 106
K ; Engine diagnostics 264
L h This lamp has no func-tion
M æ Reserve fuel 264
N å ESP® OFF 260
O ! ABS 258
P J Brakes 258
32 Instrument clusterAt
a g
lanc
e
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page: Multifunction display 210
; Audio/COMAND display;see the separate operatinginstructions
= ?
Switches on LINGUA-TRONIC; see the separateoperating instructions
? ~
Rejects or ends a call 215Exits telephone book/redial memory6
Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryWX
Adjusts the volume8
Mute
Function PageA =;
Selects a menu 2099:
Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 209a
Confirms the selection 209Hiding display messages 229
B %
Back 209Switches off LINGUA-TRONIC; see the separateoperating instructions
Multifunction steering wheel 33
At a
gla
nce
Centre console
Centre console, upper section
Function Page: Audio system/COMAND
Online; see the separateoperating instructions
; c Seat heating 96
= c PARKTRONIC 182
? ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion 146
A £ Hazard warninglamps 108
Function PageB 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp 52
C Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 155å AMG vehicles: ESP® 66
D & Auxiliary heating 134
34 Centre consoleAt
a g
lanc
e
Centre console, lower section
i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever
Function PageD Ashtray 277
Cigarette lighter 278Power socket 278Stowage compartment 269
E Stowage compartment 269
Function PageF Cup holders 275
G Stowage compartment 269
H Audio/COMAND control-ler; see the separate oper-ating instructions
Centre console 35
At a
gla
nce
Overhead control panel
Function Page: u Switches the rear
interior lighting on/off 112
; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 111
= | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 111
? ë Deactivates tow-away protection 70
A Rear-view mirror 98
Function PageB ê Deactivates the inte-
rior motion sensor 70
C Spectacles compartment 269
D 3 Opens/closes thepanorama sliding sunroofwith roller sunblinds 87
E c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 112
F p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 111
36 Overhead control panelAt
a g
lanc
e
Door control panel
Function Page: Opens the door 80
; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 80
= r45= Savesthe seat and exterior mirrorsettings 101
? Adjusts the seats electri-cally 94
A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 99
Function PageB W Opens/closes the
side windows 84
C n Activates/deacti-vates the override featurefor the side windows in therear compartment 61
Door control panel 37
At a
gla
nce
38
Useful information .............................. 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 50Driving safety systems ....................... 61Anti-theft systems .............................. 69
39
Safe
ty
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Occupant safety
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf service work is not carried out correctly, theoperating safety of your vehicle may be affec-ted. This could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and cause an accident. More-over, the safety systems may no longer beable to protect you or others as they aredesigned to do.Always have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGModifications to or work performed incor-rectly on the following parts can result in therestraint systems not functioning as intended:Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat
belts and their anchorage points, belt ten-sioners, belt force limiters and airbagsRthe wiringRnetworked electronic systemsAirbags and belt tensioners could fail todeploy or be triggered in an accident despitethe deceleration force being sufficient to trig-ger the systems, or could be triggered unin-tentionally. For this reason, never make anymodifications to the restraint systems.Therefore, you must not tamper with elec-tronic components or their software.
The seat belts, together with SRS (Supple-mental Restraint System), are complemen-tary, co-ordinated restraint systems(Y page 41). They reduce the risk of injuryin specific, pre-defined types of accident sit-uations and thereby increase occupantsafety. However, seat belts and airbags gen-erally do not protect against objects pene-trating the vehicle from the outside.To ensure that the restraint systems candeliver their full potential protection, makesure that:Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted
properly (Y page 92)Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly
(Y page 46)Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if
deployed (Y page 42)Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly
(Y page 98)Rthe restraint systems have not been modi-
fiedAn airbag increases the protection of vehicleoccupants wearing a seat belt. However, air-bags are only an additional restraint systemwhich complements, but does not replace,the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must weartheir seat belt correctly at all times, even ifthe vehicle is equipped with airbags. The air-bags are not deployed in all types of acci-dents. For example, if the protective capacityof correctly fastened seat belts is notincreased by deploying the airbags, the air-bags will not deploy.Airbag deployment only provides increasedprotection if the seat belt is worn correctly.The seat belt helps, firstly, to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theairbag. Secondly, in a head-on collision, forexample, the seat belt prevents the vehicleoccupant from being propelled towards thepoint of impact.
40 Occupant safetySa
fety
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
IntroductionSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAirbagsRAirbag control unit (with crash sensors)RBelt tensioners for the front seat belts and
the outer seat belts in the rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat
belts and the outer seat belts in the rearSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with parts of the vehicle's interiorin the event of an accident. It can also reducethe forces to which occupants are subjectedduring an accident.
SRS warning lamp
G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, individual systemsmay be triggered unintentionally or might notbe triggered in the event of an accident witha high rate of vehicle deceleration.A malfunction has occurred if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
up when the ignition is switched on.Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp does not go out after a fewseconds.Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up again.In this case, have SRS checked immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.SRS functions are checked regularly when theignition is switched on or the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.
Triggering of belt tensioners and air-bagsDuring the first stage of a collision, the airbagcontrol unit evaluates important physicaldata relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRmagnitudeBased on the evaluation of this data, the air-bag control unit pre-emptively triggers thebelt tensioners in the first stage.If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-tion, the front airbags are also deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air-bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi-cle deceleration or acceleration in the eventof a collision. In the first deployment stage,the front airbag is filled with enough propel-lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. Thefront airbag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is reached within a fewmilliseconds.The belt tensioner and airbag triggeringthresholds are variable and are adapted to thedetected rate of deceleration or accelerationof the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. The triggering process must takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-
sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-
cleRthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collidedFactors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an airbag,
Occupant safety 41
Safe
ty
Z
nor do they provide an indication of airbagdeployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantly,e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbagbeing deployed. This is the case if only partswhich are relatively easily deformed are affec-ted and the rate of deceleration is not high.Conversely, airbags may be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor defor-mation. This is the case if, for example, veryrigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficient decelerationoccurs as a result.
i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-gered if the seat belt tongues on the frontseats are correctly engaged in the seat beltbuckles.
i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different airbag systems workindependently of each other.How the airbag system works is deter-mined by predicting the severity of the acci-dent, especially vehicle deceleration oracceleration, and the type of accident:Rhead-on collisionRside impactRoverturn
Airbags
Important safety notes
G WARNINGAirbags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.Observe the following notes to reduce the riskof serious or even fatal injury caused by airbagdeployment:Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, preg-
nant women – must wear their seat beltcorrectly at all times and lean back againstthe backrest, which should be positionedas close to the vertical as possible. The
head restraint must support the back of thehead at about eye level.Ralways secure children less than
1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suit-able child restraint systems.Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat
position that is as far away from the airbagas possible. The driver's seat position mustallow the vehicle to be driven safely. Thedriver's chest should be as far away fromthe centre of the driver's airbag cover aspossible.Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible. This is especially important ifyou have secured a child in a child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat.Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children
– must not lean their head into the area ofthe window in which the sidebag/window-bag is deployed.Rrearward-facing child restraint systems
must not be fitted to the front-passengerseat unless the front-passenger airbag hasbeen disabled. On the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger airbag is disabledif a child restraint system with a trans-ponder for automatic child seat recognitionis fitted to the front-passenger seat in avehicle equipped with automatic child seatrecognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp must be continuouslylit.If the front-passenger seat of your vehicledoes not have automatic child seat recog-nition, or your rearward-facing childrestraint system does not have a trans-ponder for automatic child seat recogni-tion, children must be secured in a childrestraint system on a suitable seat in therear. If you secure a forward-facing childrestraint system to the front-passengerseat, you must move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp-
edged objects in the pockets of clothing.
42 Occupant safetySa
fety
Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover ofthe driver's/front-passenger front airbag,particularly when the vehicle is in motion.Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.You could be injured if the airbag isdeployed and you are holding the inside ofthe steering wheel.Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the
vehicle.Rmake sure that there are no people, ani-
mals or objects between the vehicle occu-pants and the area where the airbags aredeployed.Rdo not place any objects between the seat
backrest and the door.Rdo not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat
hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks.Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders,
to the doors.It is not possible to rule out a risk of injurybeing caused by an airbag, due to the highspeed at which the airbag must be deployed.
G WARNINGAirbag functionality can only be assured if thefollowing parts are not covered and no badgesor stickers are attached to them:Rpadded steering wheel bossRkneebag cover below the steering columnRfront-passenger airbag coverRouter side of front seat bolstersRside trim next to the rear seat backrestRroof frame cover between the front A-pillar
and the C-pillar in the rear compartment
G WARNINGWhen an airbag deploys, a small amount ofpowder is released. The powder may causeshort-term breathing difficulties to personssuffering from asthma or other pulmonaryconditions.
In order to prevent potential breathing diffi-culties, you should leave the vehicle as soonas it is safe to do so. You can also open thewindow to allow fresh air to enter the vehicleinterior. The powder does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle.
G WARNINGThe airbag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. Do not touch them as youcould burn yourself.Have the airbags replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants arenot protected by the airbags in the event ofanother accident.
Airbag deployment slows down and restrictsthe movement of the vehicle occupant.If the airbags are deployed, you will hear abang and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.The airbag installation locations are identifiedby the AIRBAG symbol.
Front airbags! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. The system may thendetect that the seat is occupied and if thereis an accident, the restraint systems on thefront-passenger side could be deployed.Have restraint systems that have been trig-gered replaced.
Occupant safety 43
Safe
ty
Z
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front air-bag ; deploys in front of and above the glovecompartment.The front airbags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that airbag
deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending on whether the seat belt is being
usedRindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
cleIf the vehicle overturns, the front airbags aregenerally not deployed.Vehicles with automatic child seat recog-nition in the front-passenger seat: front-passenger airbag ; is only activated if thesystem determines that the front-passengerseat is occupied. The 4 PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre con-sole does not light up (Y page 52).
If a child restraint system is fitted to the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF 4 indicator lamp on the centre con-sole is not on:Ra child restraint system without a trans-
ponder for automatic child seat recognitionhas been fitted orRa child restraint system with a transponder
has been fitted incorrectly
Driver's kneebag
Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steer-ing column. The driver's kneebag is triggeredtogether with the front airbag. The driver'skneebag is designed to operate together withthe front airbag in frontal impacts if certainthresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee-bag operates best in conjunction with cor-rectly positioned and fastened seat belts.Driver's kneebag : increases the driver'sprotection against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries
Sidebags
G WARNINGIf you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that, for safety reasons, youonly use seat covers that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The seat covers must have a special tear seamfor sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot
44 Occupant safetySa
fety
deploy correctly and would fail to provide theintended protection in the event of an acci-dent. Appropriate seat covers can beobtained, for example, from a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.
Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ;deploy next to the outer seat cushions.When deployed, the sidebags offer additionalprotection of the thorax for occupants on thefront seats as well as also of the pelvis for thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe sidebags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front airbagsRindependently of the belt tensionersIf the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are gen-erally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed ifthe system detects high vehicle decelerationor acceleration in a lateral direction anddetermines that sidebag deployment canoffer additional protection to that provided bythe seat belt.
Windowbags
Windowbags : enhance the level of protec-tion for the head (but not chest or arms), ofthe vehicle occupants on the side of the vehi-cle on which the impact occurs.Windowbags : are integrated into the sideof the roof frame and deployed in the areafrom the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Windowbags are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion, e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occursRon the driver's and the front passenger's
side if the vehicle overturns and the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by theseat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupiedRindependently of the front airbags
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)
G WARNINGWhen adjusting the seat, make sure thatnobody can become trapped.
! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when movingthe seat back. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.
Occupant safety 45
Safe
ty
Z
PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardous sit-uations.PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rwhen BAS activates, e.g. in emergency
braking situationsRwhen adaptive Brake Assist intervenes
powerfully on vehicles with DISTRONICPLUSRin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severely
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rvehicles with the memory function: the
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in anunfavourable position.Rif the vehicle skids, the panorama sliding
sunroof and the side windows are closed sothat only a small gap remains.
If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pretensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belts are not released:X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but
only when the vehicle is stationary.The belt pretensioning is reduced and thelocking mechanism is released.
More information about seat belt adjustment,a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE (Y page 47).
Seat belts
Important safety notes
G WARNINGA seat belt which is not worn correctly, orwhich has not been engaged in the seat beltbuckle correctly, cannot provide the intendedlevel of protection. Under certain circumstan-
ces, this could cause severe or even fatal inju-ries in the event of an accident.Therefore, make sure that all occupants — inparticular, pregnant women — wear their seatbelts correctly at all times.RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body
and must not be twisted.Therefore, avoidwearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.The shoulder section of the belt must berouted across the centre of your shoulder— on no account across your neck or underyour arm — and pulled tight against yourupper body. The lap belt must always passacross your lap as low down as possible, i.e.over your hip joints — not across your abdo-men. If necessary, push the seat beltslightly downwards and adjust it by pullingit in the direction the seat belt retracts.RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp
or fragile objects. Please make sure thatsuch objects are not on or in your clothing,e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seatbelt strap could become damaged and tearduring an accident and you or other vehicleoccupants could be injured.ROnly one person should use each seat belt
at any one time. Children must never travelsitting on the lap of another occupant. Thechild will not be secured in the event of anaccident, heavy braking or sudden changeof direction. This may result in the child orother occupants being seriously or fatallyinjured.RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
seat belts correctly. For this reason securepersons less than 1.50 m tall in speciallydesigned, suitable restraint systems.RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger
than twelve years of age cannot wear theseat belts correctly. For this reason securethem in special suitable child restraint sys-tems installed on a suitable seat. Additionalinformation can be found in the OperatingInstructions in the chapter "Safety", "Chil-dren in the Vehicle". Observe the installa-
46 Occupant safetySa
fety
tion instructions of the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer.RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one ofthe vehicle's occupants.
G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection unless the backrest is almostvertical. Under certain circumstances, thiscould cause severe or even fatal injuries in theevent of an accident.Before starting a journey, make sure that theseat is properly adjusted and that the back-rest is almost vertical.
G WARNINGA dirty or damaged seat belt or one that hasbeen modified or subjected to a load in anaccident no longer offers the intended level ofprotection. Under certain circumstances, thiscould cause severe or even fatal injuries in theevent of an accident.For this reason, check regularly that the seatbelts are not damaged or dirty.Always have damaged seat belts or seat beltsthat have been subjected to a load in an acci-dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat belts which havebeen approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle.
Seat belts are the most effective means ofrestraining the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident. Thisreduces the risk of vehicle occupants cominginto contact with parts of the vehicle interior.
Fastening seat belts
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 92).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-tion of the seat belt across the middle ofyour shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts auto-matically adjust to the upper body(Y page 47).
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 48).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.
Information on releasing the seat belt withrelease button ?(Y page 48).
Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.
Occupant safety 47
Safe
ty
Z
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the key to position2 in the ignition lock.Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
and you then engage the belt tongue in thebuckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certaintightening force if any slack is detectedbetween the occupant and the seat belt. Donot hold on to the seat belt tightly while it isadjusting. You can switch the seat-beltadjustment on and off in the on-board com-puter (Y page 225).The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about PRE-SAFE® can be foundin the "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupantprotection)" section (Y page 45).
Belt height adjustment
You can adjust the belt height for the frontseats. Adjust the belt to a height that allowsthe upper part of the seat belt to be routedacross the centre of your shoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various posi-tions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease :.
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Let go of belt sash guide release : and
make sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.
Releasing the seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfil theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.X Guide belt tongue ; back to belt sash
guide :.
Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder for all occupantsto fasten their seat belts. It may light up con-tinuously or flash. In addition, a warning tonemay sound.The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out andthe warning tone ceases when the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelt.For certain countries only: regardless ofwhether the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up for six secondsafter the engine is started. It then goes out if
48 Occupant safetySa
fety
the driver and the front passenger have fas-tened their seat belts.
i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelt" (Y page 257).
Rear seat belt status indicator
Example: rear seat belt status indicator
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-cator indicates the rear seat on which the beltis fastened. In the example, the occupant onthe right rear seat, when viewed in the direc-tion of travel, is secured. The ü symbol inthe display indicates a fastened seat belt. If aseat belt is not fastened or if a seat is notoccupied, the ý symbol is displayed.The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-cator appears in the multifunction display foraround 30 seconds if:Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx-
imately 10 km/h.Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten
their seat belts while the vehicle is inmotion.Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and
the vehicle drives off again.You can also cancel the rear seat belt statusindicator immediately (Y page 229).
i The status indicator for the rear-compart-ment seat belts is only available for certaincountries.
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters
G WARNINGIf the seat belt tensioners have been trig-gered, they provide no additional protection
in the event of another accident. Therefore,have belt tensioners which have been trig-gered replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.Comply with safety regulations when dispos-ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-BenzService Centre can provide details of theseregulations.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue inthe buckle on the front-passenger seat.Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be trig-gered in the event of an accident.
The front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with belt tensionersand belt force limiters.The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts inan accident, pulling them close against thebody.Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupantsback towards the backrest.The belt tensioners can only be activatedwhen:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
"6 SRS warning lamp" (Y page 41).Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
each of the front seat belts.The belt tensioners on the outside seats in therear compartment are triggered independ-ently of the lock status of the seat belts.The belt tensioners are triggered dependingon the type and severity of an accident:Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col-
lision the vehicle decelerates or acceler-ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-ing the initial stages of the impactRif, in the event of a side impact, on the side
opposite the impact the vehicle deceler-
Occupant safety 49
Safe
ty
Z
ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc-tionRin certain situations where the vehicle over-
turns and the system determines that it canprovide additional protection
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt forcelimiter and this is triggered, the force exertedby the seat belt on the vehicle occupant isreduced.The belt force limiters on the front seats aresynchronised with the front airbags, whichtake on a part of the deceleration force. Thisresults in the load being distributed over agreater area.
Children in the vehicle
Child restraint systems
Important safety notes
G WARNINGTo reduce the risk of serious or even fatalinjury to the child in the event of a suddenchange in direction, braking or an accident:Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
twelve years of age must always be securedin special child restraint systems on a suit-able vehicle seat. This is necessarybecause the seat belts are not designed forchildren.RDo not drive with a child secured in a rear-
ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat. Exception: if the vehi-cle is equipped with automatic child seatrecognition on the front-passenger seatand the child is secured in a child restraintsystem with transponders for automaticchild seat recognition
Rif you secure a forward-facing childrestraint system to the front-passengerseat, you must move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap
of another occupant. Due to the forceswhich occur in the event of a suddenchange of direction, heavy braking or anaccident, it would not be possible torestrain the child. The child could be thrownagainst parts of the vehicle interior and beseriously or even fatally injured.
G WARNINGThe child restraint system cannot perform itsprotective function if it is not correctly fittedto a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thechild could be seriously or even fatally injured.For this reason, when fitting a child restraintsystem, observe the manufacturer's installa-tion instructions and the correct use of thechild restraint system.Child restraint systems should be fitted to therear seats. Children are generally better pro-tected there.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion. There-fore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion,under the child restraint system.Only use child restraint systems with the orig-inal cover designed for them. Only replacedamaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benzcovers.We recommend the use of child restraint sys-tems which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles.
G WARNINGDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. They could injure them-selves on parts of the vehicle. They could alsobe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
50 Children in the vehicleSa
fety
Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-tem could heat up and the child could burnherself/himself on them.If a child opens a door, the child or other per-sons could be injured as a result. They couldget out and injure themselves or be injured bya passing vehicle.Observe the general notes on the HOLD func-tion, which can be found under the same key-word.
G WARNINGUnsecured or incorrectly positioned loadsincrease the risk of injury for children and allother occupants in the event of:Ran accidentRsudden brakingRa sudden change of directionDo not transport heavy or hard objects in thevehicle interior unless they are secured. Youwill find further information under "Loadingguidelines" in the index.
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, securethe child using a child restraint system whichis appropriate to the size, age and weight ofthe child. You should preferably fit therestraint system to a suitable rear seat. Makesure that the child is secured for the trip.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usethe listed child restraint systems(Y page 58). You can obtain further infor-mation about the correct child restraint sys-tem from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz careproducts to clean child restraint systems.You can obtain information about this atany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat
G WARNINGIf the front-passenger airbag is not disabled:Ra child secured in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat could be seri-ously and even fatally injured by the front-passenger airbag deploying. This is espe-cially a risk if the child is in the immediatevicinity of the front-passenger airbag whenit deploys.Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-tem. Only secure a rearward-facing childrestraint system on a suitable rear seat.Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
the rearmost position if you secure a childin a forward-facing child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger airbag is not disabled:Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition on the front-passenger seatRin vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition in the front-passenger seat, if nospecial child restraint system with trans-ponders for automatic child seat recogni-tion in the front-passenger seat has beenfittedRon vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat, if thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp4 is not lit.
To make you aware of this danger, a corre-sponding warning sticker has been affixed onthe dashboard and on both sides of the sunvisor on the front-passenger side.Information about recommended childrestraint systems is available at anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Children in the vehicle 51
Safe
ty
Z
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing childrestraint system
Do not use a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on a seat that is protected by an air-bag installed in front of it.
Automatic child seat recognition on thefront-passenger seat
G WARNINGIf the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor lamp does not light up when the childrestraint system is fitted, the front-passengerairbag has not been disabled. If the front-passenger airbag deploys, the child could beseriously or even fatally injured.Proceed as follows:Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system
on a suitable rear seat.or
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat andmove the front-passenger seat to the rear-most position.Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-ognition on the front-passenger seat func-tions/communicates correctly, never placeobjects, e.g. a cushion, under the childrestraint system. The entire base of the childrestraint system must always rest on the seatcushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraintsystem cannot perform its intended protec-tive function in the event of an accident, andcould lead to injuries.
G WARNINGDo not place electronic devices on the front-passenger seat, e.g.:Rlaptops, when switched onRmobile phonesRcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or
access cardsSignals from electronic equipment can causeinterference in the automatic child seat rec-ognition sensor system. This can lead to asystem malfunction. This may cause the4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp to light up without there being a childseat with transponders for automatic childseat recognition fitted. The front-passengerairbag will not then deploy during an accident.It is also possible that the 6 SRS warninglamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light upbriefly when you turn the key in the ignitionlock to position 2.
52 Children in the vehicleSa
fety
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicledoes not have automatic child seat recogni-tion, this is indicated by a special sticker. Thesticker is affixed to the side of the dashboardon the front-passenger side. The sticker isvisible when you open the front-passengerdoor.Vehicles without automatic child seat recog-nition on the front-passenger seat: if you turnthe key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the45 indicator lamp lights up briefly buthas no function. It does not indicate that thereis automatic child seat recognition on thefront-passenger seat.
The sensor system for child restraint systemsin the front-passenger seat detects whethera special Mercedes-Benz child seat with atransponder for automatic child seat recog-nition has been fitted. In this case,45 indicator lamp : lights up. Thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled.
i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis-abled by the automatic child seat recogni-tion, the following remain enabled on thefront-passenger side:Rthe sidebagRthe windowbagRthe belt tensioner
ISOFIX child seat securing system forthe rear seats
G WARNINGA child restraint system secured by the ISOFIXchild seat securing system does not providesufficient protection for children weighingmore than 22 kg. For this reason, do notsecure children weighing more than 22 kg ina child restraint system secured by the ISOFIXchild seat securing system. If the child weighsmore than 22 kg, secure the child restraintsystem with the vehicle seat belt as well. Inaddition, when fitting a child restraint system,be sure to observe the manufacturer's instal-lation instructions and the instructions forcorrect use of the child restraint system.
G WARNINGThe child restraint system cannot perform itsprotective function if it is not correctly fittedto a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thechild could be seriously or even fatally injured.For this reason, when fitting a child restraintsystem, be sure to observe the manufactur-er's installation instructions and the instruc-tions for correct use of the child restraint sys-tem.For safety reasons, when installing childrestraint systems on the rear seats, only usechild restraint systems with the ISOFIX childseat securing system, which are specially tes-ted and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles.An incorrectly fitted child restraint systemcould come loose and seriously or even fatally
Children in the vehicle 53
Safe
ty
Z
injure the child or other vehicle occupants.When fitting the child restraint system, alwaysmake sure that it is engaged correctly in thesecuring rings on both sides.
G WARNINGPlease note that if child restraint systems, ortheir retaining systems, are damaged or sub-jected to a load in an accident, they may notbe able to provide their protective function.This could result in serious or even fatal inju-ries to the secured child in the event of anaccident, heavy braking or a sudden changein direction.For this reason, have child restraint systemsand their anchorages which have been dam-aged or subjected to a load in an accidentchecked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.
! When fitting the ISOFIX child restraintsystem, make sure that the seat belt for thecentre seat does not get trapped. Other-wise, the seat belt could be damaged.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system.Comply with the manufacturer's instruc-tions when installing the ISOFIX childrestraint system.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. Securing rings : for two ISO-FIX child restraint systems are fitted on theleft and right of the rear seats.
Top Tether
Important safety notesG WARNINGMake sure that the rear seat backrest is fullylocked. When the red lock verification indica-tors on the left and right are no longer visible,the rear seat backrests are locked. If the rearseat backrests are not locked, occupantscould be injured in the event of an accident,e.g. by objects that are thrown forward fromthe luggage compartment.
Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the ISOFIX child restraint systemsecured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. Ithelps reduce the risk of injury even further.The Top Tether anchorage points are fitted onthe rear side of the rear seat backrests.X Vehicles with adjustable head
restraints: move the head restraintupwards.
X Route Top Tether belt = under the headrestraint between the two head restraintbars.
54 Children in the vehicleSa
fety
Vehicles without adjustable head restraints:X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route
Top Tether belt = centrally over headrestraint .
orX Top Tether belt with two belt straps:
route Top Tether belts = on the left andright past the side of head restraint .
X Hook Top Tether hook ; of Top Tether belt= into Top Tether anchorage :.Ensure that:RTop Tether hook ; is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage : as shown.RTop Tether belt = is not twisted.RTop Tether belt = is routed between rear
seat backrest and luggage compartmentcover if luggage compartment cover isfitted.
X Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: move the head restraint backdown slightly again if necessary(Y page 96). Make sure that you do notinterfere with the correct routing of TopTether belt =.
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system withTop Tether. Comply with the manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.Make sure that Top Tether belt = is tight.
Children in the vehicle 55
Safe
ty
Z
Problems with automatic child seat recognition
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The 45 indica-tor lamp on the centreconsole is lit.
A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a trans-ponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has there-fore been disabled as desired.
G WARNINGThere is no child restraint system fitted to the front-passengerseat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning.It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the 45 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp doesnot light up briefly when you switch the ignition on.There is a risk of injury.X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
e.g.:RLaptopRMobile phoneRCards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
If the 45 indicator lamp remains lit:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Suitable positioning of the child restraint systemsKey to the letters used in the table:X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use
in this weight category.UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category
and are approved for use in this weight category.L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recom-
mended child restraint systems" (Y page 58).
56 Children in the vehicleSa
fety
Seat positions
Weight catego-ries
Front-passenger seat Rear seat1
Front-passenger front airbag is not disabled
Front-passenger front airbag is disabled
Left, right Centre
Category 0: up to 10 kg
X U2, 3, L2, 3 U, L U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg
X U2, 3, L2, 3 U, L U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg
UF3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg
UF3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L
Category III: 22 to 36 kg
UF3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label.
Example: approval label on the child restraint system
1 If you use a category 0 or 0+ baby car seat on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not come in contact with the baby car seat.
2 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the"Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 45indicator lamp must be on.
3 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position, the backrest to an almost verticalposition, and the belt height adjustment to the lowest position. For seats with electrical adjustment, the seatcushion angle must be set to the highest and most upright position.
Children in the vehicle 57
Safe
ty
Z
Key to the letters used in the table:X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight cat-
egory and/or size category.IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal"
category which are approved for use in this weight category.IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of
"Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 58).Suitability of the rear seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left andright
Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0: up to 10 kgup to approximately 6 months
E ISO/R1 IL
0+: up to 13 kgup to approximately 15 months
E ISO/R1 IL
D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL
I: 9 to 18 kg between approx-imately 9 months and 4 years
D ISO/R2 IL4, 5
C ISO/R3 IL
B ISO/F2 IUF4, 5
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
Recommended child restraint systemsWhen installing a child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat rec-ognition on the front-passenger seat:X Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
4 Vehicles with the Style or Urban package or with front seats with 4-point or 6-point anchorages: move thefront seat to the uppermost position.
5 Vehicles that have front seats with 2-point anchorages: move the front seat to the uppermost position.
58 Children in the vehicleSa
fety
Weight catego-ries
Manufac-turer
Type Approval number (E1 ...)
Order num-ber(A 000 ...)6
Automatic child seat recognition
Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approx-imately 6 months
BritaxRömer
BABYSAFEPLUS
03 30114604 301146
970 10 00 Yes
Group 0+: up to 13 kg up to approx-imately 15 months
BritaxRömer
BABYSAFEPLUS
03 30114604 301146
970 10 00 Yes
Category I: 9 to 18 kgbetween approximately 9 months and 4 years
BritaxRömer
DUOPLUS
03 30113304 301133
970 11 00 Yes
970 16 00 No
Group II/III: 15 to 36 kgbetween approximately 4and 12 years
BritaxRömer
KIDFIX 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes
970 19 00 No
Suggested "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems:
Weight catego-ries
Size cate-gory
Manufac-turer
Type Approval number(E1 ...)
Order number6
Auto-matic child seat recogni-tion
Carry-cot F – – – – –
G – – – – –
Group 0:up to 10 kg
E – – – – –
Group 0+:up to 13 kg
E BritaxRömer
BABY SAFEISOFIXPLUS
04 301146 B6 6 868224
No
Children in the vehicle 59
Safe
ty
Z
Weight catego-ries
Size cate-gory
Manufac-turer
Type Approval number(E1 ...)
Order number6
Auto-matic child seat recogni-tion
D – – – – –
C – – – – –
Group I:9to 18 kg
D – – – – –
C – – – – –
B – – – – –
B1 BritaxRömer
DUO PLUS 04 301133 A000 97011 00
Yes
A000 97016 00
No
A – – – – –
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNINGActivate the child-proof locks for the reardoors and the override switch for the rearwindows when children are travelling in thevehicle. Otherwise, the children could opendoors or side windows while the vehicle is inmotion and injure themselves or others.
G WARNINGDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. They could injure them-selves on parts of the vehicle. They could alsobe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-tem could heat up and the child could burnherself/himself on them.
If a child opens a door, the child or other per-sons could be injured as a result. They couldget out and injure themselves or be injured bya passing vehicle.Observe the general notes on the HOLD func-tion, which can be found under the same key-word.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
You can secure each door individually withthe child-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot be
6 Colour code 9H95.
60 Children in the vehicleSa
fety
opened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :.X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win-dows
X To activate/deactivate: press button :.If indicator lamp is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If the indicator lamp is off, operationis possible using the switches in the rearcompartment.
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems overviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 61)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (adaptive
Brake Assist and distance warning func-tion) (Y page 62)RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 65)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 65)REBD (electronic brake force distribution)
(Y page 69)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 69)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 69)
Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of accident nor over-ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys-tems are merely aids designed to assist driv-ing. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and forbraking in good time. Always adapt your driv-ing style to suit the prevailing road, weatherand traffic conditions and maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-fully.
i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tyres andthe road surface. Pay particular attentionto the information regarding tyres, recom-mended minimum tyre tread depths etc. inthe "Wheels and tyres" section(Y page 318).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-ing safety systems described in this sectionwork as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems(Y page 61).
G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-
Driving safety systems 61
Safe
ty
Z
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 258) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 230).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.
BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal with force until the braking sit-uation is over.
X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.
BAS (Brake Assist)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 61).
G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.
BAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofthe adaptive Brake Assist and the distancewarning signal, which are described in thefollowing.
Distance warning function
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems(Y page 61).
G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
62 Driving safety systemsSa
fety
G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation; do not rely on the distance warningfunction alone.
FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate the distance warning function in theon-board computer (Y page 218).
Vehicles with a black and white multi-function display: when the distance warningfunction is activated, the Ä symbolappears in the status overview in the multi-function display.Vehicles with a colour multifunction dis-play: when the distance warning function isdeactivated, the æ symbol appears in theassistance graphics in the multifunction dis-play.The distance warning function can help youto minimise the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision. If the distance warning func-tion detects that there is a risk of a collision,you will be warned visually and acoustically.Without your intervention, the distance warn-ing function cannot prevent a collision.The distance warning function issues a warn-ing at speeds:Rof around 30 km/h or more, if, over several
seconds, the distance maintained to thevehicle travelling in front is insufficient. The· distance warning lamp then lights upin the instrument cluster.Rof around 7 km/h or higher, if you very
quickly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,
and the · distance warning lamp willlight up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.
orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of around 70 km/h, the dis-tance warning function can also react to sta-tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parkedvehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will alert you both visually andacoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, in
multi-storey car parksRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
motorcycleRa vehicle travelling in front on a different
lineFollowing damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at slow speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.
Driving safety systems 63
Safe
ty
Z
Adaptive Brake Assisti Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems(Y page 61).
G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions. In these cases, Adaptive Brake Assistmay not intervene. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking dur-ing hazardous situations at speeds above30 km/h and uses the radar sensor systemto evaluate the traffic situation.With the help of a sensor system, adaptiveBrake Assist can detect obstacles that are inthe path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.Should you approach an obstacle and adap-tive Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-sion, adaptive Brake Assist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision.Should you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicleAdaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if adaptive BrakeAssist requires particularly high brake pres-sure, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simul-taneously.Up to vehicle speeds of around 250 km/h,adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reactingto moving objects that have already been rec-ognised as such at least once over the periodof observation. Adaptive Brake Assist doesnot react to stationary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available dueto a malfunction in the radar sensor system,the brake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
ing the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
for example, in multi-storey car parksRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
motorcycleRa vehicle travelling in front on a different
lineFollowing damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at slow speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.
64 Driving safety systemsSa
fety
Adaptive brake lampsIf you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BASor adaptive Brake Assist, the brake lampsflash rapidly. In this way, traffic travellingbehind you is warned in an even more notice-able manner.If you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn-ing lamps are activated automatically. If thebrakes are applied again, the brake lampslight up continuously. The hazard warninglamps switch off automatically if you travelfaster than 10 km/h. You can also switch offthe hazard warning lamps using the hazardwarning switch button (Y page 108).
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available incertain countries.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 61).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tyresand the road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilise thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
can also stabilise the vehicle during braking.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 61).
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for example
if the road surface is slippery on one side. Inaddition, more drive torque is transferred tothe wheel or wheels with traction.ETS remains active when you deactivateESP®.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilise the vehicle. In addition, other drivingsafety systems are switched off. This increa-ses the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off theignition. Application of the brakes byESP® may otherwise destroy the brake sys-tem.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni-tion when the electric parking brake isbeing tested using a dynamometer.Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out ona 2-axle dynamometer. Before operatingthe vehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified specialist workshop.You could otherwise damage the drive trainor the brake system.
! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with thefront or rear axle raised.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing yourvehicle with the front axle raised, it is impor-tant that you observe the notes onESP®(Y page 312).Vehicles with 4MATIC: when towing yourvehicle with both axles on the ground, it isimportant that you observe the notes onESP®(Y page 312).
Driving safety systems 65
Safe
ty
Z
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFFwarning lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup continuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and theå ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit contin-uously, ESP® is not available due to a mal-function.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 260) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 230).
i Only use wheels with the recommendedtyre sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.
Characteristics of ESP®
General notesIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
stances.X When pulling away, only depress the accel-
erator pedal as far as is necessary.X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle stopsmoving. When pulling away again, the enginestarts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre-viously selected status. Example: if ESP®
was deactivated before the engine wasswitched off, ESP® remains deactivated whenthe engine is switched on again.The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle stopsmoving. When pulling away again, the enginestarts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre-
viously selected status. Example: if ESP®
was deactivated before the engine wasswitched off, ESP® remains deactivated whenthe engine is switched on again.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 61).You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.
G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.
In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when the
vehicle's own oversteering and understeer-ing characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.
66 Driving safety systemsSa
fety
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button :.The M handling mode warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up. TheSPORT handling mode message appearsin the multifunction display.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button :.The M handling mode warning lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out.
X To deactivate ESP®: press button : untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷OFF message appears in the mul-tifunction display.
X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP®ON message appears in the multifunc-tion display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to a
limited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.Rengine torque is restricted to a limited
degree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it
activated if you brake firmly with assis-tance from ESP®.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon-
ger available; nor is it activated if you brakefirmly with assistance from ESP®.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon-
ger available; nor is it activated if you brakefirmly with assistance from ESP®.RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Driving safety systems 67
Safe
ty
Z
Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)
Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate:(Y page 218).
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.
X To activate:(Y page 218).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
ESP® trailer stabilisation
General notesIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins tolurch, ESP® assists you in this situation.ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking andlimiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised.
Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilisation will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins tolurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brakefirmly.ESP® trailer stabilisation is active abovespeeds of about 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work ifESP® is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunction.
68 Driving safety systemsSa
fety
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems(Y page 61).
G WARNINGIf EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-ses the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 258) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 232).EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.
ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 180) andhill start assist (Y page 145). For furtherinformation, see Driving tips (Y page 166).
STEER CONTROLSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilisation.This steering support is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when youbrakeRthe vehicle starts to skid.If there is an ESP® malfunction, you will notreceive any steering support from STEER
CONTROL. Power steering will, however, con-tinue to function.
Anti-theft systems
ImmobiliserThe immobiliser prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.X To activate: remove the key from the igni-
tion lock.X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. The engine canbe started by anyone with a valid key that isleft inside the vehicle.
i The immobiliser is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key.Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-tem is primed after approximately15 seconds.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with thekey.
orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Anti-theft systems 69
Safe
ty
Z
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is primed and you open:Rthe vehicle with the emergency key ele-
mentRa doorRthe tailgateRthe bonnetX To stop the alarm: insert the key into the
ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.
orX Press the % or & button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that has triggered it, forexample.
Tow-away protection
FunctionAn audible and visual alarm is triggered if yourvehicle's angle of inclination is altered whiletow-away protection is primed. This can occurif the vehicle is jacked up on one side, forexample.
ActivatingX Make sure that:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe tailgate is closed.Only then is the tow-away protectionprimed.
X Lock the vehicle with the key.Tow-away protection is primed afterapproximately 60 seconds.
DeactivatingX Unlock the vehicle with the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Tow-away protection is switched off auto-matically.
Deactivating
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly.X Lock the vehicle with the key.
Tow-away protection is deactivated.Tow-away protection remains deactivateduntil:Rthe vehicle is unlocked againRa door is opened and closed againRthe vehicle is locked againTo prevent a false alarm, deactivate the tow-away protection if you lock your vehicle andit:Ris being transportedRis being loaded onto a ferry or car trans-
porter, for exampleRis parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a
split-level garage
Interior motion sensor
FunctionWhen the interior motion sensor is primed, avisual and audible alarm is triggered if move-ment is detected in the vehicle interior. Thiscan occur if someone reaches into the vehicleinterior, for example.
70 Anti-theft systemsSa
fety
ActivatingX Make sure that:Rthe side windows are closed.Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed.Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grabhandles on the roof trim.
This will prevent false alarms.X Make sure that:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed.Rthe tailgate is closed.Only then is the interior motion sensorprimed.
X Lock the vehicle with the key.The interior motion sensor is primed afterapproximately 30 seconds.
DeactivatingX Unlock the vehicle with the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The interior motion sensor is switched offautomatically.
Deactivating
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.X Lock the vehicle with the key.
The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-ted until:Rthe vehicle is unlocked againRa door is opened and closed againRthe vehicle is locked againTo prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicleand:Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.Rthe panorama sliding sunroof remains
open.Rthe side windows remain open.
i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with adouble lock function. The doors cannot beopened from the inside if the vehicle hasbeen locked with the key (Y page 80).Deactivate the interior motion sensorbefore you lock the vehicle with the key.The doors can then be opened from theinside after the vehicle has been lockedfrom the outside with the key. Observe the"Important safety notes" (Y page 79).
Anti-theft systems 71
Safe
ty
Z
72
Useful information .............................. 74Key ....................................................... 74Doors .................................................... 79Luggage compartment ....................... 82Side windows ...................................... 83Panorama sliding sunroof .................. 86
73
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Key
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren or animals unattended in the vehicle.Always keep the key out of reach of children.
G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, thereis a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.
G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to the key,the key could be unintentionally turned in theignition lock. This could cause the engine tobe switched off. There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe key. Remove any bulky keyrings beforeinserting the key into the ignition lock.
! Keep the key away from strong magneticfields. Otherwise, the remote control func-tion could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another keyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
filmRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseUnited Kingdom only:
G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer getout, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.
If the vehicle has been locked with the key,then the double lock function is activated asstandard. You can deactivate the double lockfunction by deactivating the interior motionsensor (Y page 70). The doors can then beopened from the inside after the vehicle hasbeen locked from the outside. The anti-theftalarm system is triggered if the door isopened from the inside. Switch off the alarm(Y page 69).
74 KeyOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
Key functions
: & To lock the vehicle; % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button ;.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.X To lock centrally: press button :.
The key centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flapWhen unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.
i When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 222).
i You can also set an audible signal to con-firm that the vehicle has been locked. Theaudible signal can be activated and deacti-vated using the on-board computer(Y page 223).
Changing the settings of the lockingsystem
You can change the settings of the lockingsystem. This means that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilbattery check lamp (Y page 76) flashestwice.
i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle
The key now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-ton twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 76).
Emergency key element
General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe key, use the emergency key element.If you use the emergency key element tounlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 69).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press the % or & button on the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Key 75
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
If you unlock the vehicle using the emergencykey element, the fuel filler flap will not beunlocked automatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
key into the ignition lock.
Removing the emergency key element
X Push release catch : in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time, removeemergency key element ; from the key.
Battery of the key
Important safety notes
G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.
H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.
Checking the battery
X Press the & or % button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp : lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp : does not light up briefly.
X Replace the battery (Y page 76).
i If the key battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, press-ing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle
i You can obtain a battery from any quali-fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
76 KeyOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
X Take the emergency key element out of thekey (Y page 75).
X Press emergency key element ; into theopening in the key in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover : opens.When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
X Repeatedly tap the key against your palmuntil battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery traycover : and then press to close it.
X Insert the emergency key element into thekey.
X Check the function of all key buttons on thevehicle.
Key 77
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
Problems with the key
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the key.
The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the % / & button.
If this does not work:X Check the key battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 76).X Lock (Y page 81) or unlock (Y page 81) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the % / & button.
The key is faulty.X Lock (Y page 81) or unlock (Y page 81) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the emer-gency key element.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
78 KeyOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot bestarted using the key.
The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 304).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 308).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot bestarted using the key.
The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing
this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren or animals unattended in the vehicle.Always keep the key out of reach of children.
G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, thereis a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.
United Kingdom only:
G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer getout, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.
If the vehicle has been locked with the key,then the double lock function is activated asstandard. You can deactivate the double lockfunction by deactivating the interior motionsensor (Y page 70). The doors can then beopened from the inside after the vehicle hasbeen locked from the outside. The anti-theft
Doors 79
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
alarm system is triggered if the door isopened from the inside. Switch off the alarm(Y page 69).
Unlocking and opening the doorsfrom the inside
X Pull door handle ;.If the door is locked, locking knob : popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.
For all countries except the United King-dom:You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe key, opening a door from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 69).You can only open the rear doors from insidethe vehicle if they are not secured by thechild-proof locks (Y page 60).Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehiclehas been locked with the key, the double lockfunction is activated as standard. It is thennot possible to open the doors from inside thevehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor(Y page 70) before you lock the vehicle withthe key. The doors can then be opened fromthe inside after the vehicle has been lockedfrom the outside. The anti-theft alarm systemis triggered if the door is opened from theinside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 69).
Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This can be useful if you wishto lock the vehicle before pulling away, forexample.
X To unlock: press button :.X To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors and the tailgate are closed,the vehicle locks.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe key.For all countries except the United King-dom: you can open a door from inside thevehicle even if it has been locked.If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe key, opening a door from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 69).Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehiclehas been locked with the key, the double lockfunction is activated as standard. It is thennot possible to open the doors from inside thevehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor(Y page 70) before you lock the vehicle withthe key. The doors can then be opened fromthe inside after the vehicle has been lockedfrom the outside. The anti-theft alarm systemis triggered if the door is opened from theinside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 69).
80 DoorsOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
You can only open the rear doors from insidethe vehicle if they are not secured by thechild-proof locks (Y page 60).If the vehicle has been locked using the lock-ing button for the central locking, or has beenlocked automatically, and a door is openedfrom the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked
Automatic locking feature
X To deactivate: press and hold button :for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.
i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-
eter.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 223).
Unlocking the driver's door (emer-gency key element)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe key, use the emergency key element.If you use the emergency key element tounlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 69).X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 75).X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise to position 1.The door is unlocked.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn theemergency key element clockwise.
X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.
X Insert the emergency key element into thekey.
Locking the vehicle (emergency keyelement)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with thekey, use the emergency key element.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the tailgate.X Press the locking button (Y page 80).X Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
Doors 81
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
are still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 80).
X Close the driver's door.X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 75).X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the emergency key element clockwiseas far as it will go to position 1.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn theemergency key element anti-clockwise.
X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.
X Insert the emergency key element into thekey.
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed.
Luggage compartment
Important safety notes
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, thereis a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgatecan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 346).
You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the luggage compartment. Observe theloading guidelines (Y page 268).Do not leave the key in the luggage compart-ment. You could otherwise lock yourself out.The tailgate can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRunlocked from the inside with the emer-
gency key element
Opening/closing from the outside
OpeningX Press the % button on the key.
X Pull handle :.X Raise the tailgate.
82 Luggage compartmentOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
Closing
X Pull the tailgate down using handle :.X Let the tailgate to drop into the lock.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the& button on the key.
Tailgate emergency releaseIf the tailgate can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgatecan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 346).
You can reach the emergency release via theluggage compartment. Fold the rear backr-ests forward (Y page 272).X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 75).
X Insert emergency key element ; into theopening in trim :.
X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clock-wise.
X Push emergency key element ; in thedirection of the arrow and open the tail-gate.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.
G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the key with you and lock the vehicle.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.
Side windows 83
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility to pay atten-tion when closing a side window.
G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversingThis means that the reversing function cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If someonebecomes trapped, press the switch to openthe side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-dows
The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.
: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left
i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 61).
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To open fully: press the corresponding
switch beyond the point of resistance.Automatic closing is started.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X To close fully: pull the corresponding
switch beyond the pressure point. Auto-matic closing is started.
X To interrupt the automatic opening/closing: press/pull the correspondingswitch again.
i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/clos-ing process is started in the correspondingdirection. You can stop automatic opera-tion by pressing again.
i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after switching off the engine orremoving the key. This function remainsactive for five minutes or until the driver'sor front-passenger door is opened.
84 Side windowsOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
Convenience opening featureYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the key is used to carry outthe following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds
i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the key. The keymust be close to the driver's door handle.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's doorhandle.
X Press and hold the % button until theside windows and the panorama sunroofare in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama slid-ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblindsare opened first.
X Press and hold the % button again untilthe panorama sliding sunroof is in thedesired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening:release the % button.
Convenience closing feature
G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. When closing make sure that no partsof the body are in the closing area.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama sliding sunroofOn vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,you can then close the roller sunblinds.
i The key must be close to the driver's doorhandle.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's doorhandle.
X Press and hold the & button until theside windows and the panorama slidingsunroof are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama sliding sunroof are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:X Press and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblinds of the panorama slidingsunroof close.
X To interrupt convenience closing:release the & button.
Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if:Rthe side window opens again slightly after
being closed fully.Rthe side window can no longer be fully
opened or closed.X Close all doors.X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 84).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 84).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.
Side windows 85
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
Problems with the side windows
G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked or reset, the sidewindow closes with increased or maximumforce. The reversing function is then notactive. Parts of the body could be trapped inthe closing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. To stop the closing process,release the switch or push the switch again toreopen the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If a sidewindow is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.
If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.
G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.
G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNINGAt high speeds the sliding sunroof automati-cally lowers slightly at the rear. This could trapyou or other persons. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody reaches into thesweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicleis in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, reduce speedimmediately, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions. The sliding sunroof opensagain to its original position.If the maximum position is not reached, youcan raise it further.
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroofif it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-functions may occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.
i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minor
86 Panorama sliding sunroofOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility to pay atten-tion when closing the sliding sunroof.
G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversingThis means that the reversing function cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by pressing again.
i After opening the sliding sunroof, theroller sunblind closes slightly automati-cally. This reduces drafts in the vehicle inte-rior.
i If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear,it lowers slightly automatically at higherspeeds. The noise level in the vehicle inte-rior is reduced as a result.At low speeds it raises again automatically.
i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the key. This function remainsactive for five minutes or until you open afront door.
i The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if aroof carrier is fitted. In order to allow ven-
Panorama sliding sunroof 87
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
tilation of the vehicle interior, you can raisethe sliding sunroof.If contact is made with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the slidingsunroof lowers slightly but remains raisedat the rear.
Rain-closing featureThe rain-closing feature is only available forvehicles with a rain sensor.When the key is in position 0 in the ignitionlock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closesautomatically:Rif it starts to rainRat extreme outside temperaturesRafter six hoursRif there is a malfunction in the power supplyThe sliding sunroof remains raised at the rearin order to allow ventilation of the vehicleinterior.
i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed whenbeing closed by the rain-closing feature, itopens again slightly. The rain-closing fea-ture is then deactivated.
The sliding sunroof does not close if:Rit is raised at the rear.Rit is blocked.Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor,e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge.
Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblindparts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic opening/closing processThe opening/closing process is stopped.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thesliding sunroof is closed.
Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the roller blind during theclosing process, the roller blind opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility to pay atten-tion when closing the roller blinds.
G WARNINGThe reversing feature especially does notreact to soft, light and thin objects, such assmall fingers.This means that the reversingfeature cannot prevent someone being trap-ped in these situations. There is a risk ofinjury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic opening/closing processThe closing process is stopped.
88 Panorama sliding sunroofOp
enin
g an
d cl
osin
g
Opening and closing
Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by pressing again.
i After opening the sliding sunroof, theroller sunblind closes slightly automati-cally. This reduces drafts in the vehicle inte-rior.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblindsIf the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblindsdo not move smoothly, reset the sliding sun-roof and the roller sunblinds:X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof(Y page 87) and the roller sunblinds(Y page 89) can be fully opened and closedagain.
X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
G WARNINGIf you do not reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption,then the reversing function will malfunction ornot work. The sliding sunroof closes withincreased or maximum force. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area inthe process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.In such or similar situations always make surethat no parts of the body are in the closingarea. Always reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption.
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the slidingsunroof is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3
switch down again to the point of resist-ance until the sliding sunroof is closedThe sliding sunroof is closed with increasedforce.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again dur-ing closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3
switch down again to the point of resist-ance until the sliding sunroof is closedThe sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.
Panorama sliding sunroof 89
Open
ing
and
clos
ing
Z
90
Useful information .............................. 92Correct driver's seat position ............ 92Seats .................................................... 93Steering wheel .................................... 98Mirrors ................................................. 98Memory functions ............................. 101
91
Seat
s, s
teer
ing
whe
el a
nd m
irror
s
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Correct driver's seat position
Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 93).X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjus-
ted.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 94)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 94)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air-
bag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
tion.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly (Y page 94).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe centre of the head restraint.
Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 98).X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted correctly.Adjusting the steering wheel(Y page 98)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 46).X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 47).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your
shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the
hip jointsX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 99)so that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions.
X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat and exterior mirror settings(Y page 101).
92 Correct driver's seat positionSe
ats,
ste
erin
g w
heel
and
mirr
ors
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children adjust the seats, they couldbecome trapped, especially if they are unat-tended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.
G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There isa risk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.
G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.
G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju-ries, for example. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.
G WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when moving
Seats 93
Seat
s, s
teer
ing
whe
el a
nd m
irror
s
Z
the seat back. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.
i The head restraints in the front and rearseats can be removed.7
For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:RLuggage compartment enlargement
(folding down the rear seats)(Y page 272)
Adjusting the seats manually
Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards
or rearwards.X Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.
Backrest angleX Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.
Seat heightX Pull handle = upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached thedesired height.
Seat cushion angleAdjust the angle so that your thighs are lightlysupported.X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the seats electrically
: Head restraint height8
; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle
i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 101).
Adjusting the head restraints
G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.
7 Not on vehicles with sports seats.8 Not available on vehicles with sports seats.
94 SeatsSe
ats,
ste
erin
g w
heel
and
mirr
ors
G WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.
General notesFor vehicles with sports seats, you cannotadjust the head restraints or remove and fitthe rear head restraints.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aftposition
This function allows you to adjust the dis-tance between the head restraint and theback of the head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.There are a number of detents.
X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button : and push the headrestraint backwards.
X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged in posi-tion.
Adjusting the head restraints electri-callyX To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 94) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.
Seats 95
Seat
s, s
teer
ing
whe
el a
nd m
irror
s
Z
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.
Removing and fitting the rear seat headrestraintsG WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.
The rear head restraints on the outer seatscan be removed and refitted.
X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards inorder to remove the head restraint(Y page 272).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.
X To refit: insert the head restraint so thatthe notches on the bar are on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.
: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G WARNINGIf you repeatedly switch on seat heating, theseat cushion and backrest padding maybecome very hot. The health of vehicle occu-pants with limited temperature sensitivity ora limited ability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they may
96 SeatsSe
ats,
ste
erin
g w
heel
and
mirr
ors
even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch on the seat heatingrepeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.
Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched off prema-turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle'selectrical system voltage is too low becausetoo many electrical consumers are switchedon.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window heatingor interior lighting.
AMG Performance SeatTo adjust the contour of the seat and forimproved lateral support, you can individuallyadjust the front seats.
Adjusting the seat cushion lengthX To extend the seat cushion: press but-
ton :.X To retract the seat cushion: press but-
ton ;.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seatcushionX To set the side bolsters of the seat
cushion narrower: press button =.X To set the side bolsters of the seat
cushion wider: press button ?.
Seats 97
Seat
s, s
teer
ing
whe
el a
nd m
irror
s
Z
Adjusting the seat backrest side bol-stersX To set the side bolsters of the seat
backrest narrower: press button A.X To set the side bolsters of the seat
backrest wider: press button B.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.
G WARNINGChildren could become trapped by the steer-ing wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
Adjusting the steering wheel
G WARNINGThe steering wheel may move unexpectedly ifyou adjust it while driving. This could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Make sure that the steering wheel is lockedbefore driving off. Never unlock the steeringwheel when the vehicle is in motion.
: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzleswitch : forwards or back.
98 MirrorsSe
ats,
ste
erin
g w
heel
and
mirr
ors
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNINGThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects visible in the mirrors arecloser than they appear. You could misjudgethe distance from road users driving behindyou when changing lanes, for instance. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should therefore always look over yourshoulder to determine the actual distancefrom road users driving behind you.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button : for the left-hand exteriormirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button = as longas the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated if therear window heating is switched on and the
outside temperature is low. Heating takes amaximum of 10 minutes.
i The exterior mirrors can also be heatedmanually by switching on the rear windowheating.
Folding the exterior mirrors in/out elec-trically
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h(30 mph) you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 225).X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
the ignition lock.X Briefly press button :.
Mirrors 99
Seat
s, s
teer
ing
whe
el a
nd m
irror
s
Z
Folding the exterior mirrors in/outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 225):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows.X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold the mirror-folding button (Y page 99) until you hear aclick and then the mirror engage in posi-tion.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 99).
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrorsThe "Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors" functionis only available if the vehicle is equipped withthe "Mirror package".The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirrorThe mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.
Parking position of the exterior mirroron the front-passenger side
General notesThe "Parking position for the exterior mirroron the front-passenger side" function is onlyavailable if the vehicle is equipped with the"Memory package".
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gearYou can set the front-passenger side exteriormirror so that you can see the rear wheel onthat side as soon as you engage reverse gear.You can store this position.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the key is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.
X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror.The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.
100 MirrorsSe
ats,
ste
erin
g w
heel
and
mirr
ors
Using the memory buttonYou can set the front-passenger side exteriormirror so that you can see the rear wheel onthat side as soon as you engage reverse gear.You can store this position. This setting canbe stored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the key is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror.
X Press memory button M ? and one of thearrows on adjustment button = withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side with the corresponding but-ton (Y page 99).
X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of
15 km/hRabout ten seconds after you have disen-
gaged reverse gearRif you press button : for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side
Memory functions
Storing settings
G WARNINGIf you use the memory function on the driver'sside while driving, the adjustments couldcause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside while the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNINGIf the memory function adjusts the seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any part oftheir body within the sweep of the seat. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, immediatelyrelease the memory function position button.The adjustment is stopped.
G WARNINGIf children activate the memory function, theycould become trapped, especially if they areunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraintRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passengersides
Memory functions 101
Seat
s, s
teer
ing
whe
el a
nd m
irror
s
Z
X Adjust the seat (Y page 94).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's
side (Y page 99).X Briefly press the M memory button and
then press storage position button 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.
Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat andexterior mirrors are in the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.
102 Memory functionsSe
ats,
ste
erin
g w
heel
and
mirr
ors
Useful information ............................ 104Exterior lighting ................................ 104Interior lighting ................................. 111Replacing bulbs ................................. 112Windscreen wipers ........................... 117
103
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Exterior lighting
General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.
Driving abroad
General notesIf your journey takes you to countries wherevehicles are driven on the opposite side of theroad to the country in which the vehicle isregistered, your headlamps must be switchedto symmetrical dipped beam as soon as pos-sible after crossing the border. This preventsoncoming traffic from being dazzled. Sym-metrical lights do not illuminate as large anarea of the edge of the carriageway.
Vehicles with halogen headlampsX Affix special masking sheets on the head-
lamps.i You can obtain these special stickers
from a qualified specialist workshop.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use genuine Mercedes-Benz masking
tape. Your headlamps could otherwise bedamaged.Remove the masking tape when you areonce again driving on the same side of theroad as in the country in which your vehicleis registered.
Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps
X Turn protective cap : anti-clockwise andremove it.
X Push switchover lever ; down.X Insert protective cap : and turn it clock-
wise.Convert the headlamps back to asymmetricaldipped beam as soon as possible after return-ing across the border.
Vehicles with Intelligent Light SystemX Before crossing the border, set the head-
lamps to symmetrical dipped beam andafter returning back to asymmetricaldipped beam via the "Dipped-beam head-lamps for driving on the right/left" functionin the on-board computer (Y page 221).
If the headlamps are converted to symmetri-cal dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and"extended range foglamps" functions are notavailable.
104 Exterior lightingLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using the:Rlight switchRheadlamp range control (vehicles with hal-
ogen headlamps only) (Y page 107)Rcombination switch (Y page 107)Ron-board computer (Y page 221)
Light switch
Operation
1W Left-hand parking lamps2X Right-hand parking lamps3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
ment cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
lampsBR Rear foglampCN Foglamp (vehicles with front fog-
lamps only)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to Ã.The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/parking lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the key from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the key in posi-
tion 0.
Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, thedipped-beam headlamps may not be switchedon automatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.
The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the preferred light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
side lamps are switched on or off automat-ically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have
switched on the daytime driving lights func-tion in the on-board computer, the daytimedriving lights or the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.
X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
The daytime driving lights improve the detect-ability of your vehicle during the day. Here,the daytime driving lights function must beswitched on via the on-board computer(Y page 221).When the dipped-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up and the daytimedriving lights switch off.
Dipped-beam headlampsWhen the ignition is switched on and the lightswitch is in position L, the side lamps anddipped-beam headlamps are switched on
Exterior lighting 105
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
even if the light sensor does not sense darkambient light conditions. This is advanta-geous when there is fog or rain.X To switch on the dipped-beam head-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.
FoglampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the foglamps improve visi-bility as well as making it easier for other roadusers to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the side lamps or together withthe side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps.X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key
in the ignition lock to position 2 or start theengine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.
X To switch off the front foglamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
Only vehicles with front foglamps are equip-ped with the "Foglamp" function; for how tooperate the foglamps on vehicles with theIntelligent Light System (Y page 109).
Rear foglampThe rear foglamp improves the visibility ofyour vehicle in heavy fog for the followingtraffic. Please observe the country-specificlaws on the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
key in the ignition lock to position 2 or startthe engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear foglamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps or theIntelligent Light System: when the rear fog-lamp is switched on, the lower 15 LEDs ofthe brake lamp in the tail lamp switch offdue to a legal requirement: for right-handtraffic only in the left-hand tail lamp and forleft-hand traffic only in the right-hand taillamp.
Side lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-
charged, the side lamps or parking lampsare automatically switched off to enablethe next engine start. Always park yourvehicle safely and sufficiently lit accordingto legal standards. Avoid the continuoususe of the T side lamps for severalhours. If possible, switch on the X rightor the W left parking lamp.
X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.Depending on the equipment level, thegreen indicator lamp or the scale illumina-tion in the instrument cluster light up.
Parking lampsSwitching on the parking lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.X To switch on the parking lamps: the key
is not in the ignition lock or it is in posi-tion 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).
106 Exterior lightingLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Adjusting the headlamp range (halogenheadlamps)The headlamp range control allows you toadjust the cone of light from the headlampsto suit the vehicle load.
Headlamp range controlg Driver's seat and front-passenger seat
occupied1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
rear seats occupied2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
rear seats occupied, luggage compart-ment laden
3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu-pied and maximum permissible rear axleload utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer
X Start the engine.X Turn the headlamp range control to the
position which corresponds to the load inyour vehicle.
Combination switch
Turn signals
: Main-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= Headlamp flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.
X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow ; or ?.
Main-beam headlampsX To switch on the main-beam head-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction ofarrow :.In the à position, the main-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.
Exterior lighting 107
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the main-beamheadlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the main-beam head-lamps: move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,it controls activation of the main-beamheadlamps (Y page 110).
Headlamp flasherX To switch on: turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
The hazard warning lamps switch on auto-matically if:Ran airbag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 70 km/h and comes toa standstill
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :.
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofover 10 km/h again after a full brake appli-cation.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.
Headlamp cleaning systemIf the "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated five times (Y page 117) while thelights are on and the engine is running, theheadlamps are cleaned automatically. Whenyou switch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset and count-ing is resumed from 0.
Intelligent Light System
General notesThe Intelligent Light System is a system thatadjusts the headlamps automatically to suitthe prevailing driving and weather conditions.It offers advanced functions for improved illu-mination of the road surface, e.g. dependingon the vehicle speed or weather conditions.The system includes the active light function,cornering light function, motorway mode andextended range foglamps. The system is onlyactive when it is dark.You can activate or deactivate the "IntelligentLight System" using the on-board computer(Y page 221).
108 Exterior lightingLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Active light function
The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to the steer-ing movements of the front wheels. In thisway, relevant areas remain illuminated whiledriving. This allows you to recognise pedes-trians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-ing light function can only be activated whenthe dipped-beam headlamps are switched on.Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below
40 km/h and the turn signal is activated orthe steering wheel is turned.Rif you are driving at speeds between
40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steer-ing wheel.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turnthe steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi-tion.The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.
Motorway mode
Motorway mode increases the range of thebeam.Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above
110 km/h and do not make any large steer-ing movements for 1000 mRif you are driving at speeds above
130 km/hNot active: if you are driving at speeds below80 km/h following activation.
Extended range foglamps
The extended range foglamps reduce theglare experienced by the driver and improve
Exterior lighting 109
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
the illumination of the edge of the carriage-way.Active: if you are driving at speeds below70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp.Not active: if you are driving at speeds above100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglampfollowing activation.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist does not recogniseroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistrecognises road users too late or not at all. Inthis, or in similar situations, the automaticmain-beam headlamps will not be deactivatedor activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the main-beam headlamps ingood time.
You can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between dipped beam andmain beam automatically. The system recog-nises vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortravelling in front of your vehicle, and conse-quently switches the headlamps from mainbeam to dipped beam.The system automatically adapts the dipped-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the main-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windscreen near the overhead controlpanel.
X To activate: activate the Adaptive High-beam Assist function using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 222).
X Turn the light switch to Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction ofarrow : (Y page 107).The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up when it is dark and thelight sensor activates the dipped-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds above45 km/h:The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above55 km/h and no other road users are rec-ognised:The main-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below45 km/h or other road users are recog-nised or the roads are adequately lit:The main-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in
110 Exterior lightingLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
the instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.
X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display goes out.
Headlamps misted up on the insideThe headlamps may mist up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.
X Switch on the lights and drive off.The level of moisture diminishes, depend-ing on the length of the journey and theweather conditions (humidity and temper-ature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting
on= v To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
A p To switch the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off
B To switch the automatic interior lightingcontrol on
Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off; p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
Interior lighting control
Important notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the key is in position 2 in theignition lock.The brightness of the ambient lighting may beset using the on-board computer(Y page 222).
Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to centre
position B.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.
The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the key from the ignition lock
Interior lighting 111
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
The interior lighting is activated for a shorttime when the key is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 223).
Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on:
set the switch to the c position.X To switch off the interior lighting: set the
switch to the | position or (if the dooris closed) to the centre position.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.
Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.
orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
key.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
G DANGERXenon bulbs are under high voltage. You canget an electric shock if you remove the coverof the xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work onthe xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs,you can recognise this by the following: thecone of light from the xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs
G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and plug connectors canbecome very hot during use. When replacinga bulb, you could burn yourself on these com-ponents. There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforereplacing the bulb.
There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 113). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself replaced at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen fitting.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
112 Replacing bulbsLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. Thedetails for the bulb type can be found in thelegend.
Halogen headlamps: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W; Main-beam headlamp/side lamp/park-
ing lamp: H15 55 W/15 W= Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
Tail lamp (halogen headlamps): Reversing lamp: W 16 W; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W= Tail lamp/brake lamp: W 16 W? Rear foglamp: W 16 WA Tail lamp: W 16 W
Replacing the front bulbs
Fitting/removing the cover on the frontwheel archYou must remove the cover from the frontwheel housing before you can change thefront bulbs.
X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.X Push cover ; down.X To fit: push cover ; up.X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked.
Replacing bulbs 113
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
Dipped-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)
G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurised.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. If nec-essary, have bulbs changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
X Remove the cover in the front wheel arch(Y page 113).
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise andpull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pullit out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch
(Y page 113).
Main-beam headlamps and side lamps/parking lamps (vehicles with halogenheadlamps)
G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurised.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. If nec-essary, have bulbs changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
X Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.X Turn bulb ; anti-clockwise and pull it out.X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the
stop.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
114 Replacing bulbsLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps)
X Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull
it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Cornering lamps (Intelligent Light Sys-tem)
G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurised.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. If nec-essary, have bulbs changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
X Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
Replacing the rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim pan-elsYou must open the side trim panel in the lug-gage compartment before you can replacethe bulbs in the tail lamps.
Left-hand side trim panel
Replacing bulbs 115
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
Right-hand side trim panelX To open: turn release knob : 90° in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trimpanel ;.
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turnrelease knob : 90° in the opposite direc-tion to the arrow.
Tail lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the luggage compartment.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 115).
X Release and remove connector ;.X Unscrew wing nut : and remove the lamp
cluster.
Lamp clusterX Remove plastic nut ? using a suitable
item, e.g. a coin.X Release attachments =.X Remove the bulb holder from the lamp clus-
ter.
Bulb holderA Tail lamp/brake lampB Reversing lampC Rear foglampD Tail lampE Turn signalsX Tail lamp/brake lamp/rear foglamp/
reversing lamp: remove the correspond-ing bulb from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Turn signal lamp: lightly press the bulb
into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwiseand remove it from the bulb holder.
116 Replacing bulbsLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.
X Secure the bulb holder to attachments =on the lamp cluster and tighten plasticnuts ?.
X Insert the lamp cluster into the vehicle andmake sure that it sits correctly in guidesF.
X Tighten wing nut ; and re-establish con-tact with connector :.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 115).
Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on/off
! Do not operate the windscreen wiperswhen the windscreen is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windscreen canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windscreen is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the wind-screen wipers in dry weather conditions,always operate them using washer fluid.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears onthe windscreen after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, this maybe due to wax or other residue. Clean thewindscreen with washer fluid after an auto-matic car wash.
Combination switch1 $ Windscreen wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind-
screen using washer fluidX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-screen becomes dirty in dry weather con-ditions, the windscreen wipers may be acti-vated inadvertently. This could damage thewindscreen wiper blades or scratch thewindscreen.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wiping fre-quency is automatically set according to theintensity of the rain. In the Å position, therain sensor is more sensitive than inthe Ä position, causing the windscreenwipers to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreenwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions. Replace the wiper blades twice a year,ideally in spring and autumn.
Windscreen wipers 117
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
Combination switch: è Switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.X Turn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you can betrapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiperblades, make sure that you touch only thewiper arm of the windscreen wiper.
! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiperarm is folded away from the windscreen/rear window.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windscreen/rear window.Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windscreen/rear window, thewindscreen/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
screen.
X Press both release clips ;.X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
118 Windscreen wipersLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Fitting the wiper blades
X Position new wiper blade : withrecess B on lug A.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction ofarrow = onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seatedcorrectly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-screen.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiperblade ; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Fitting the wiper bladesX Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seatedcorrectly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiperarm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-dow.
Windscreen wipers 119
Ligh
ts a
nd w
inds
cree
n w
iper
s
Z
Problems with the windscreen wipers
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windscreen wipersare jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreenwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipersfail completely.
The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The spray nozzles aremisaligned.
The windscreen washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hitsthe centre of the windscreen. The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
120 Windscreen wipersLi
ghts
and
win
dscr
een
wip
ers
Useful information ............................ 122Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 122Operating the climate control sys-tem ..................................................... 126Adjusting the air vents ..................... 139
121
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Overview of climate control systems
Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise mist up.To prevent the windows from misting up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only
brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation functionRswitch on the defrost windscreen function
briefly, if requiredTHERMATIC automatic climate control/THERMOTRONIC automatic climate controlregulates the temperature and the humidityof the vehicle interior and filters out undesir-able substances from the air.THERMATIC automatic climate control/THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control isonly operational when the engine is running.Optimum operation is only achieved with theside windows and panorama sliding sunroofclosed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 133).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 85). This
will speed up the cooling process and thedesired vehicle interior temperature will bereached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Service Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
i It is possible that the residual heat func-tion may be activated automatically an hourafter the key has been removed in order todry the air-conditioning system. The vehicleis ventilated for 30 minutes.
122 Overview of climate control systemsCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control
: To set the temperature (Y page 128); To demist the windscreen (Y page 130)= To set the air distribution (Y page 129)? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 132)A To set the airflow (Y page 129)B To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 126)C To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 131)
Notes on using THERMATIC automaticclimate control
Automatic climate controlThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto-matic climate control.RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by
turning control knob A clockwise to thedesired position (except position 0).RSet the temperature to 22 †.RRecommendation to avoid misting of
the windows in the event of low outside temperatures or rain: switch on the airdistribution ¯ and if possible switch offP and O(Y page 129).Deactivate air-recirculation moded(Y page 132).
Set airflow control A to a setting between3 and 6(Y page 129).RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly setairflow control A to a setting between 3and 6(Y page 129).RRecommendation for a constant vehi-
cle interior temperature: set airflow con-trol A to a position between 1 and3(Y page 129).RRecommendation for air distribution in
winter: select the O and ¯ settings(Y page 129).Recommendation for air distribution in summer: select the P or P and¯ settings (Y page 129).ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" func-
tion briefly until the windscreen is clearagain.
Overview of climate control systems 123
Clim
ate
cont
rol
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odours orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RIf you change the settings of the climate
control system, the climate status displayappears for three seconds at the bottom ofthe screen in the COMAND display. Seealso the separate COMAND Online operat-ing instructions9. You will see the currentsettings of the various climate control func-tions.
ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control out-put, you can switch off the ECO start/stopfunction by pressing the ECO button(Y page 147).
9 Only for vehicles with "COMAND Online Multimedia System" optional equipment
124 Overview of climate control systemsCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (2-zone)
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 128); To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 128)= To demist the windscreen (Y page 130)? To increase the airflow (Y page 129)A To set the air distribution (Y page 129)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 132)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 128)F To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 133)G To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 126)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)I To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 131)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
Notes on using THERMOTRONIC auto-matic climate control
Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-mate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and ¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 22 †.ROnly use the "windscreen demisting" func-
tion briefly until the windscreen is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odours orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
Overview of climate control systems 125
Clim
ate
cont
rol
erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp in the á button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. The resid-ual heat function can only be activated ordeactivated with the ignition switched off.
ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control out-put, you can switch off the ECO start/stopfunction by pressing the ECO button(Y page 147).
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off
Points to observe before useWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could then mistup. Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly.
THERMATIC automatic climate controlX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to
the desired position (except position 0)(Y page 123).
X To switch off: turn control A anti-clock-wise to position 0(Y page 123).
THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrolX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.
orX Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ̂ button goesout. The previous settings are reactivated.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.The indicator lamp in the ̂ button lightsup.
i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol: switch on climate control primarilyusing the à button.
Activating/deactivating the coolingwith air dehumidification function
Points to observe before useIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehu-midification function", the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled in warmer weather. Theair inside the vehicle will not be dehumidifiedeither. The windows can mist up morequickly. Therefore, only switch off the "Cool-ing with air dehumidification function" briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when cooling mode is active. Thisis normal and not a sign that there is a mal-function.
126 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Switching on/offX To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lightsup.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Operating the climate control system 127
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp inthe ¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation function" cannotbe switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automaticmode
Only THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol features the "control climate controlautomatically" function.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If desired, cooling withair dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehu-midification function", the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled in warmer weather. Theair inside the vehicle will not be dehumidifiedeither. The windows can mist up morequickly. Therefore, only switch off the "Cool-ing with air-dehumidification function" briefly.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.
X To switch to manual operation: press theÉ or Ë button.
orX Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.
Setting the temperature
THERMATIC automatic climate controlYou can set the temperature for the entirevehicle.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To increase/reduce: turn control :
clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 123).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 22 †.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrolDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To increase/reduce: turn controls : orE clockwise or anti-clockwise(Y page 125). Only change the temperaturesetting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
128 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Setting the air distribution
THERMATIC automatic climate control
Air distribution settings¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-
ter ventsP Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air ventsO Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air vents
i You can also activate several of the airdistribution settings simultaneously. Inorder to do this, press several of the airdistribution buttons. The air is then routedthrough different air vents.
Setting the air distributionX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X Press one or more of the P, O,¯ buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp comeson.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol
Air distribution settings¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-
ter ventsP Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air ventsO Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air ventsS Directs airflow through the centre and
side air vents as well as the footwell airvents10.
b Directs the airflow through the centreand side air vents as well as the demis-ter vents10
a Directs the airflow through the foot-well and demister vents
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed if the adjusters are turned clockwiseuntil they engage.
Setting the air distributionX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X Press the É or Ë button until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
Setting the airflow
THERMATIC automatic climate controlX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To increase/reduce: turn control A
clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 123).
THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrolX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To increase/reduce: press the K orI button.
Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with theTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.X To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lightsup.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.
X To deactivate: press the á button.The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.
10 Only for certain countries.
Operating the climate control system 129
Clim
ate
cont
rol
The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passengerside.
Demisting the windscreenYou can use this function to defrost the wind-screen or to demist the inside of the wind-screen and the side windows.
i You should only select the "Windscreendemisting" function until the windscreen isclear again.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 143).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windscreen and
front side windowsRair-recirculation mode off
i The "Windscreen demisting" functionautomatically sets the blower output to theoptimum demisting effect. As a result, theairflow may increase or decrease automat-ically after the button is pressed.
i You can adjust the blower output man-ually while the "Windscreen demisting"function is in operation:RTHERMATIC automatic climate con-
trol: turn temperature control A clock-wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 123).RTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate
control: press the ó or ô button.X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. The previous settings are reactivated.
Air-recirculation mode remains deactiva-ted.
orX Press the à button11.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.
orX THERMATIC automatic climate control:
turn temperature control : clockwise oranti-clockwise (Y page 123).THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: turn temperature controls : orE clockwise or anti-clockwise(Y page 125).
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside
THERMATIC automatic climate controlX Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function.X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
the "Windscreen demisting" function(Y page 130).
i You should only select this setting untilthe windscreen is clear again.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trolX Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function.X Activate automatic mode Ã.X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
the "Windscreen demisting" function(Y page 130).
i You should only select this setting untilthe windscreen is clear again.
11 THERMOTRONIC only.
130 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Windows misted up on the outsideX Activate the windscreen wipers.X Set the air distribution to P or O.i You should only select this setting until
the windscreen is clear again.
Rear window heating
Switching on/offThe rear window heating has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the window is clear. It otherwiseswitches off automatically after severalminutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow heating may switch off.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lightsup or goes out.
Operating the climate control system 131
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Problems with the rear window heating
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window heat-ing has switched offprematurely or cannotbe activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heat-ing can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can mist up more quickly, in partic-ular at low temperatures. Only use air-recir-culation mode briefly to prevent the windowsmisting up.You can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odours are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lightsup.
i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in thee button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.
X To deactivate: press the e button.The indicator lamp in the e button goesout.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-
side temperatures below approximately5 †.Rafter approximately five minutes if the
"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is deactivated.Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
side temperatures above approximately5 † and when the "Cooling with air dehu-midification function" is activated.
Convenience opening/closing usingthe air-recirculation button
G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. When closing make sure that no partsof the body are in the closing area.
G WARNINGDuring convenience opening parts of the bodycould be drawn in or become trappedbetween the side window and window frame.There is a risk of injury.When opening, make sure that nobody istouching the side window. If someonebecomes trapped, press the W switch
132 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
immediately to open/close the side windowin the door. The side window stops. To con-tinue closing the side window, pull on theW switch.
X Convenience closing feature: press andhold the e button until the side win-dows and the panorama sliding sunroof areclosed.The indicator lamp in the e button lightsup. Air-recirculation mode is activated.
If parts of the body are in the closing areaduring convenience closing, proceed as fol-lows:X To open/close the side window, press theW button.The side window stops.
X To then open the side window, press theW button again.
X To open/close the panorama sliding sun-roof press the 3 button.The panorama sliding sunroof stops.
X To then open the panorama sliding sunroofpress the 3 button again.
X Press the d button again for longer than2 seconds.The side windows move in the oppositedirection.
i Notes on the automatic reversing func-tion for:Rthe side window (Y page 84)Rthe panorama sliding sunroof
(Y page 87)X Convenience opening feature: press and
hold the e button until the side win-dows and the panorama sliding sunroofhave opened. The side windows and thepanorama sliding sunroof move back totheir original position.The indicator lamp in the e button goesout. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
i If you open the side windows or the pan-orama sliding sunroof manually after clos-ing with the convenience closing feature,
they will remain in this position whenopened using the convenience opening fea-ture.
Activating/deactivating the residualheat function
The residual heat function is only availablewith THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30 minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the temperature that has beenset for the vehicle interior.
i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 143).
X To activate: press the Ì button.The indicator lamp in the Ì button lightsup.
X To deactivate: press the Ì button.The indicator lamp in the Ì button goesout.
i Residual heat is deactivated automati-cally:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on
Operating the climate control system 133
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Z
Auxiliary heating
Important safety notes
G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficientventilation is not possible, toxic exhaustfumes can enter the vehicle, especially car-bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. inenclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck insnow. There is a risk of fatal injuries.You should switch off the auxiliary heating inenclosed spaces which do not have an extrac-tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle isstuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliaryheating running, keep the exhaust pipe andthe area around the vehicle clear of snow. Toguarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle away fromthe wind.
G WARNINGWhen the auxiliary heating is switched on,parts of the vehicle can become very hot.Flammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system for extendedperiods. There is a risk of fire.When the auxiliary heating is switched on,make sure that no flammable material cancome into contact with hot vehicle compo-nents.
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-tion draws on the vehicle battery. After youhave heated or ventilated the vehicle amaximum of two times, drive for a longerdistance.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularlyonce a month for about ten minutes.
The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi-cle interior to the set temperature. Thisoccurs without using the heat of the runningengine. The auxiliary heating is operateddirectly using the vehicle's fuel. For this rea-son, the fuel tank must be at least ¼ full toensure that the auxiliary heating functions.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati-cally adjusts to changes in temperature andweather conditions. For this reason, the aux-iliary heating could switch from ventilationmode to heating mode or from heating modeto ventilation mode.The auxiliary heating switches off when theengine is switched off. The auxiliary ventila-tion switches off when you turn the key to keyposition 2(Y page 143).The auxiliary heating switches off automati-cally after 30 minutes.You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation tocool the vehicle interior to a temperaturelower than the outside temperature.
Before switching onX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X Set the desired temperature.Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also beswitched on if the manually set climate con-trol is activated. Optimum comfort can beattained when the system is set to automaticmode. Set the temperature to 22 †.The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-vated or deactivated using the remote controlor the button on the centre console.The on-board computer can be used to spec-ify up to three departure times, one of whichmay be preselected (Y page 224).
134 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-lation on/off using the centre consolebutton
Switching on the auxiliary heating/venti-lation
The colours of the indicator lamps on the but-ton have the following meanings:Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched onRed Auxiliary heating switched onYellow Departure time preselected
(Y page 224)X Press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-ton : lights up.
Switching off the auxiliary heating/venti-lationX Press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-ton : goes out.
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-lation on/off using the remote controlYour vehicle comes with one remote control.You may use two additional remote controlsfor your vehicle. For more information, pleasecontact a qualified specialist workshop.The remote control has a maximum range ofapproximately 300 metres. This range isreduced by:Rsources of radio interferenceRsolid objects between the remote control
and the vehicle
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura-ble position in relation to the vehicleRtransmitting from an enclosed space
i The optimum range can be achieved if youhold the remote control vertically, pointingupwards when you press one of the but-tons.
i A battery symbol appears in the displaywhen the battery in the remote control islow. Replace the remote control battery(Y page 136).
Switching the auxiliary heating/ventila-tion on/off
Remote control: Display; . To check the status/set the depar-
ture time= ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/
ventilation? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/
ventilationA , To check the status/set the depar-
ture timeX To activate: press the u button.ON is shown in the remote control display.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.OFF is shown in the remote control display.
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat-ing/ventilationX Press the , or . button.
Operating the climate control system 135
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Z
The following messages may appear in thedisplay:
Display Meaning
The auxiliary heating/ventilation is switchedoff.
The auxiliary ventilationis switched on. The num-ber in the display showsthe remaining time (inminutes) for the auxiliaryventilation.
The auxiliary heating isswitched on. The numberin the display shows theremaining time (inminutes) for the auxiliaryheating.
A departure time hasbeen activated. Thedeparture time appearsin the display.
A departure time hasbeen activated. The aux-iliary ventilation is cur-rently activated. Thedeparture time appearsin the display.
A departure time hasbeen activated. The aux-iliary heating is currentlyactivated. The departuretime appears in the dis-play.
Setting the departure timeX Press the , or . button repeatedly
until the time to be changed appears in thedisplay.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-neously.The Î symbol in the remote control dis-play flashes.
X Press the , or . button to set thedesired departure time.
i The longer you press the , or .button, the faster the time changes.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-neously.The new departure time is stored.
Activating the set departure timeX Press the , or . button repeatedly
until the desired departure time appears inthe display.
X Press the u button.The Í symbol and the departure timeappear in the display.
Deactivating a set departure timeX Press the , or . button.
The status of the auxiliary heating is shownin the display.
X Press the . button.The first departure time stored appears inthe display.
X Press the ^ button.OFF is shown in the remote control display.
Replacing the remote control battery
G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.
136 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.
One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 isrequired.
X Prise apart the side arms of batterycover ; and pull off battery cover ;.
X Remove old battery :.X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity
signs on the back of the remote controlwhen doing so.
X Slide battery cover ; back onto theremote control.
X Use the remote control to check the vehi-cle's auxiliary heating functions.
Operating the climate control system 137
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Z
Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$FAIL
The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicleis faulty.X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
necessary.X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off
using the remote control.
©FAIL
There is too little fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
The auxiliary heating is faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
FAIL The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.The auxiliary heating was started more than twice when the enginewas switched off.X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.X Charge the starter battery.X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
138 Operating the climate control systemCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.There is too little fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.The auxiliary heating is faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Adjusting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen
and the bonnet free of blockages, such asice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles
in the vehicle interior.
i Move the adjusters for the air vents ver-tically or horizontally, to set the direction ofthe airflow.
i Optimal climate control function is ach-ieved by opening the air vents fully and set-ting the adjusters to the middle position.
Setting the centre air vents
X To open the centre air vent: turn theadjuster in one of centre air vents : anti-clockwise.
X To close the centre air vent: turn theadjuster in one of centre air vents : clock-wise until it engages.
Adjusting the air vents 139
Clim
ate
cont
rol
Z
Adjusting the side air vents
: Side window demister vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; anti-clockwise.X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; clockwise until itengages.
Setting the rear-compartment airvents
: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheelX To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
140 Adjusting the air ventsCl
imat
e co
ntro
l
Useful information ............................ 142Running-in notes ............................... 142Driving ............................................... 142Manual transmission ........................ 150Automatic transmission ................... 151Refuelling ........................................... 159Parking ............................................... 162Driving tips ........................................ 165Driving systems ................................ 168Towing a trailer ................................. 201
141
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Running-in notes
Important safety notesNew brake pads/linings and discs that havebeen replaced only achieve optimum brakingeffect after several hundred kilometres ofdriving. Compensate for the reduced brakingeffect by applying greater force to the brakepedal.
The first 1500 kmIf you treat the engine with sufficient carefrom the very start, you will be rewarded withexcellent performance for the remainder ofthe engine's life.RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine
speeds for the first 1500 km.RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this
period, e.g. driving at full throttle.RChange gear in good time, before the rev
counter needle is Ô of the way to the redarea of the rev counter.RDo not shift down a gear manually in order
to brake.Vehicles with automatic transmission:RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).
After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring thevehicle up to full road and engine speeds.
Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles:RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for
the first 1,500 km.ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
i You should also observe these notes onrunning-in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.
Driving
Important safety notes
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell may restrictthe clearance around the pedals or block adepressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-ating and road safety of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so thatthey do not get into the driver's footwell.Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-scribed in order to ensure that there is alwayssufficient room for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place several floor-mats on top of one another.
G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerably
142 DrivingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
more effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only set the automatic transmission to therespective drive positions when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. Otherwise, you could damage thedrive train.
! AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operationand engine speeds greater than 5000 rpmwhen the engine is cold. This helps to pro-tect the engine and avoids uncomfortabledriving.
Key positions
g To remove the key1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windscreen wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position
3 To start the engine
Vehicles with manual transmission: thesteering is locked when the key is taken outof the ignition lock.
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle,it can still be turned in the ignition lock.However, the ignition will not be switchedon. The engine cannot be started.
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.
G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.
i Vehicles with a petrol engine: theengine runs at a higher engine speed duringthe cold start procedure so that the cata-lytic converter can reach operating tem-perature more quickly. The sound of theengine may change as a result.
Driving 143
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Manual transmissionX Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.X Depress the clutch pedal fully.X Shift to neutral N.
i You can only start the engine when theclutch pedal is fully depressed.
Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.
Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.
i When the transmission is in position N,you can also start the engine with the brakepedal depressed.
Starting procedureX To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
position 3 in the ignition lock(Y page 143) and release it as soon as theengine is running.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key toposition 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 143).The % preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.
X When the % preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the key to position3(Y page 143) and release it as soon as theengine is running.
i You can start the engine without preglowif the engine is warm.
Pulling away
Manual transmission! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-age the vehicle.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.X Release the electric parking brake
(Y page 163).X Release the brake pedal.X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
depress the accelerator pedal.
i Follow the shift recommendations in themultifunction display for an economicaldriving style (Y page 151).
i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 223).
Automatic transmissioni It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then canthe parking lock be deactivated. If you donot depress the brake pedal, the DIRECTSELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ20 †, you can only shift out of position Pinto another transmission position whenthe engine is running.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The electric parking brake (Y page 163) isautomatically released.The red ! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
144 DrivingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 223).
i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.
Pulling away with a trailer
To ensure that you do not roll backwardswhen pulling away on an uphill slope, engagethe electric parking brake.X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues tobrake and prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards.The red ! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster remains lit.
X Depress the accelerator pedal.X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination
is held by the driving force of the engine,release lever :.The electric parking brake is released.The red ! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
i For further information on the electricparking brake, see (Y page 163).
Hill start assist
G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
The vehicle is then held for about a second.X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
downhill gradient.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is engaged.RESP® is malfunctioning.Further information on holding the vehiclestationary on uphill gradients (Y page 154).
ECO start/stop function
IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.When pulling away again, the engine startsautomatically. The ECO start/stop functionthereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Driving 145
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.
General notes
: ECO start/stop display
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-cally if the vehicle stops moving.The stop/start function is automatically acti-vated each time you start the engine with theignition key.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 147) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,the ¤ symbol is not displayed.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.
Automatic engine switch-off
General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the ¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
greenRthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-atureRthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reachedRthe battery is sufficiently chargedRthe system detects that the windscreen is
not misted up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched onRthe bonnet is closedRthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastenedIf not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol isshown in yellow.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is switched off automati-cally.
i The engine can be switched off automat-ically a maximum of four times (initial stop,then three subsequent stops) in succes-sion. The ¤ symbol is shown in yellowin the multifunction display after the enginehas been started automatically for thefourth time. When the ¤ symbol isshown in green in the multifunction display,automatic engine switch-off is again possi-ble.
Vehicles with manual transmissionThe ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically at low speeds.
X Brake the vehicle.X Engage neutral N(Y page 151) (follow
gearshift instruction : to engage neutralN, if necessary).
X Release the clutch pedal.The engine is switched off automatically.
146 DrivingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.
i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automaticstop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated.
Automatic engine start
General notesThe engine is started automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO buttonRyou engage reverse gear RRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-
screen when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's charge status is too lowRthe driver's seat belt is released or the driv-
er's door is opened
Vehicles with manual transmission! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.The engine is started automatically if you:Rdepress the clutch pedal fullyRdepress the accelerator pedal
Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not
activated and the transmission is in posi-tion D or NRdepress the accelerator pedalRmove the transmission out of position Pi Shifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the ¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function
ECO buttonX To switch off: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.
X To switch on: press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 146) are met, the ¤symbol is shown in green in the multifunc-tion display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 146) are met, the ¤symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunc-tion display. If this is the case, the ECOstart/stop function is not available.
Driving 147
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.
148 DrivingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Problems with the engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does notstart.
The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 179) or DISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 173).X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.
RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 143). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drainthe battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard. Thereserve fuel warninglamp is lit and the fuelgauge display shows 0.
The fuel tank is empty.X Refuel the vehicle.
The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 308).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Driving 149
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Vehicles with a petrolengine:The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.
The coolant tempera-ture display is showingmore than 120 †. Thecoolant warning lampmay also be on and awarning tone maysound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
to cool down.X Check the coolant level (Y page 288). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Manual transmission
Gear lever! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.
! When shifting to 5th and 6th gear, youmust press the shift lever to the right. Oth-erwise, you could shift unintentionally into3rd or 4th gear and damage the engine ortransmission.If you shift down at too high a speed (trans-mission braking), this can cause the engineto overrev, leading to engine damage.Do not use the clutch bite point to keep thevehicle stationary on uphill gradients.There is otherwise a risk of damaging theclutch.
! On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden or towing
a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3in good time. This uses the engine's brakingeffect. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.
Gear leverk Reverse gear1 to 6 Forward gears
150 Manual transmissionDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Shifting to neutral (N)
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.X Move the gear lever to position N:.
Engaging reverse gear! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you coulddamage the transmission.
X Pull the gear lever up, push it to the left andthen pull it back.
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-able when reverse gear is engaged.For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 146).
Gearshift recommendationThe gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Shift gear according to gearshift recom-mendation : when shown in the multi-function display of the instrument cluster.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral position N when you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk ofan accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.
i Bear in mind that the power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmissionis interrupted when the engine is switchedoff.To prevent the vehicle from rolling away:Rwhen the engine is switched off and the
vehicle is stationary, shift the automatictransmission to park position P andRapply the electric parking brake
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positionsAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theDIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.Information about the selector lever on AMGvehicles (Y page 153).
Automatic transmission 151
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The current trans-mission position P, R, N or D appears in thetransmission position display(Y page 152) in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.
: Transmission position display; Drive program display
i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into which transmis-sion positions you can change using theDIRECT SELECT lever.
! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission position D and drive program E orS.
Engaging park position PX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-
tion of arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.
i When you engage park position P, makesure that the transmission position displayshows P in the multifunction display.
i You can only engage park position P whenthe vehicle is stationary.
i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while the
vehicle is stationary in transmission posi-tion D or RRif you open the door while travelling at
very low speeds in transmission positionD or R
In addition, a warning tone sounds and adisplay message is shown.
i Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen-gages the parking lock. The transmission isin N neutral.At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ20 †, you can only shift out of park posi-tion P into another transmission positionwhen the engine is running.In order to shift from park position Pdirectly into R or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
down past the first point of resistance
! If the engine speed is too high, do not shiftthe automatic transmission directly fromD to R, from R to D or directly to P. Other-wise, the automatic transmission could bedamaged.
152 Automatic transmissionDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-able when reverse gear is engaged.For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 146).
X Depress the brake pedal while the vehicleis stationary.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral (N)X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
Engaging drive position DX Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle
is stationary.X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
Selector lever
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P buttonj Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive
Transmission position and drive pro-gram display
Example: Transmission position display; Drive program display
The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.
Engaging park position P
X When the vehicle is stationary, press P but-ton :.
Transmission positions
B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from roll-ing away when stopped. Do notshift the transmission into positionP unless the vehicle is stationary.
C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.
Automatic transmission 153
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.When you switch off the engine, theautomatic transmission automati-cally shifts into neutral N.
7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.
Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. Gearshifting is deter-mined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 155)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients
G WARNINGIf the clutch overheats, the electronic man-agement system is automatically deactivated.
This interrupts the power transmission. Thevehicle may, for example, roll backwards ongradients. There is a risk of an accident.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehi-cle stationary on uphill gradients by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch over-heats, a warning tone sounds.All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theStop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running display message appears in the mul-tifunction display. You will only be able tocontinue your journey once the clutch hascooled down and the display message in themultifunction display has disappeared.AMG vehicles: the Trans. oil overhea‐ted Drive on with care display messageappears in the multifunction display.Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the acceleratorpedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle sta-tionary on uphill gradients by:Rdepressing the brake pedalRactivating the HOLD functionRengaging the electric parking brake
KickdownAMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick-down in temporary manual drive program M.For further information on the manual driveprogram M, see (Y page 156).Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.
154 Automatic transmissionDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Towing a trailerTrailer towing is not permissible on the fol-lowing models:RA 45 AMG 4MATICRVehicles with the AMG Sports packageX Drive in the middle of the engine speed
range on uphill gradients.X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-
ent, select a lower gear (Y page 166), evenif cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS, orSPEEDTRONIC are activated.
Program selector button
General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs with differ-ent driving characteristics.
Example: program selector button
E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gearshifting
X Press program selector button : repeat-edly until the letter for the desired gearshiftprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.
i The automatic transmission switches toautomatic drive program E each time theengine is started.
i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 156).
AMG vehicles
C ControlledEfficiency
Comfortable, economicaldriving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gearshifting
X Press program selector button : repeat-edly until the letter for the desired gearshiftprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.
i The automatic transmission switches toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.
i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 156).
Automatic transmission 155
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Steering wheel gearshift paddles
: Left steering wheel gearshift paddle(shifts down)
; Right steering wheel gearshift paddle(shifts up)
In drive program M, you can change gearyourself using the steering wheel gearshiftpaddles.If you pull the left or right steering wheel gear-shift paddle when in automatic drive programE (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S, theautomatic transmission shifts into drive pro-gram M for a limited time. Depending onwhich gearshift paddle is pulled, the auto-matic transmission immediately shifts intothe next gear down or up.AMG vehicles: you can activate drive pro-gram M RACE START (Y page 181) using thesteering wheel gearshift paddles.
i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel gearshift paddles when the trans-mission is in position D.
i For further information on the manualdrive program, see (Y page 156).
Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) is characterised by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting upsooner.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin.
Drive program S is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine settings.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later.Ras a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos-sibly being higher.
Manual drive program
IntroductionIn manual drive program M, you can changegear yourself by using the steering wheelgearshift paddles. For this, the transmissionmust be in position D. The gear currentlyselected and engaged is shown in the multi-function display.Manual drive program M differs from driveprograms E (drive program C on AMG vehi-cles) and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.
Gear Driving situations
= To use the engine's braking effect
156 Automatic transmissionDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
5 To use the braking effect of theengine on downhill gradients andfor driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions
4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches
Activating the manual drive programActivating permanentlyX Press the program selector button
(Y page 155) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.Manual drive program M remains activeuntil drive program E (drive program C onAMG vehicles) or S is engaged.
Activating temporarilyX Pull the right or left steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 156).M is shown in the multifunction display.Manual drive program M is temporarilyactive. Depending on which gearshift pad-dle is pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear downor up.
i When manual drive program M is activa-ted via the steering wheel gearshift pad-dles, the temporarily active manual driveprogram M will be deactivated automati-cally after a limited time, if the driving sit-uation permits. The automatic transmis-sion switches to the previously activateddrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) or S. When driving on downhillgradients, the temporarily active manualdrive program M will only be deactivated ifthe accelerator pedal is depressed whilethe vehicle is rolling downhill.
Shifting upX Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.
i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): inorder to prevent engine damage the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts up:Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached andRyou depress the accelerator pedal.
AMG vehicles:! In manual gearshift program M, the auto-
matic transmission does not shift up auto-matically even when the engine limitingspeed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. You must make sure thatthe engine speed does not reach the redarea of the rev counter. Otherwise, there isa risk of engine damage.
AMG vehicles! In manual gearshift program M, the auto-
matic transmission does not shift up auto-matically even when the engine limitingspeed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. You must make sure thatthe engine speed does not reach the redarea of the rev counter. Otherwise, there isa risk of engine damage.
: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator
Automatic transmission 157
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X If the colour in the speedometer multifunc-
tion display changes to red and the UP dis-play message is shown, shift up a gear.
DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.
i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts down.
i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle untilthe transmission selects the optimum gearfor the current speed.
i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.
KickdownAMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick-down in temporary manual drive program M.You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.
i During kickdown, you cannot shift gearsusing the steering wheel gearshift paddles.
i If you apply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gearwhen the maximum engine speed isreached. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.
Deactivating the manual drive programX Press the program selector button
(Y page 155) repeatedly until E or Sappears in the multifunction display.
Deactivating the temporary manual drive programX Pull and hold the right steering wheel gear-
shift paddle until the automatic transmis-sion shifts into the last active automaticdrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) or S.
i When manual drive program M is deacti-vated, the automatic transmission in auto-matic drive program E (drive program C onAMG vehicles) or S may shift from the cur-rent gear into a higher or lower gear. Thisis dependent on the position of the accel-erator pedal, speed and load.
158 Automatic transmissionDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Problems with the transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger shifts into all ofthe gears.Reverse gear can nolonger be engaged.
The transmission is in emergency mode.X Stop.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Refuelling
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefuelling.
G WARNINGFuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a danger of injury.Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuelvapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-dren.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin
with water and soap immediately.RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water immediately. Seekimmediate medical attention.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.RChange any clothing that has come into
contact with fuel immediately.
G WARNINGElectrostatic charge can cause sparks andthereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk offire and explosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. This discharges any electrostaticcharge that may have built up.
G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,components in the exhaust system may over-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol todiesel fuel.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch
Refuelling 159
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
on the ignition if you accidentally refuelwith the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel willenter the fuel system. Even small amountsof the wrong fuel could result in damage tothe fuel system and the engine. The repaircosts are high. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuelcan. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-tion system could otherwise be blocked byparticles from the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during therefuelling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel mayspray out when you remove the fuel pumpnozzle.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 339).
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
: To open the fuel filler flap; Tyre pressure table= To insert the fuel filler cap? Fuel type to be refuelled
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you open or close the vehiclewith the key.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayedæ in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.
OpeningX Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler flap anti-clockwise andremove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on theinside of fuel filler flap =.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.
ClosingX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.
160 RefuellingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
immediately (Y page 143).X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does notstart.
The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-pletely dry.X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 143).X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds
until it runs smoothly.or
X Start the engine using the touch-start function. To do this, turnthe key to position 3 in the ignition lock and then release itimmediately (Y page 143).
If the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds
(Y page 143).X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten sec-
onds until it runs smoothly.or
X Start the engine again via the touch-start function.If the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Refuelling 161
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe key battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 75).orX Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 75).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rial can come into contact with hot vehiclecomponents. In particular, do not park on drygrassland or harvested grain fields.
G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of park
position P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Ron vehicles with manual transmission,
engage first gear or reverse gear.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission must be in position P andthe transmission position display mustshow P in the multifunction display.Rthe key must be removed from the ignition
lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the kerb.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral position N when you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk ofan accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
162 ParkingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.
Vehicles with manual transmissionX Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.The immobiliser is activated.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmissionAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles)X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.
Selector lever in AMG vehicles
AMG vehicles:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Press P button :.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.The immobiliser is activated.
i If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.If you then open one of the front doors orremove the key from the ignition, the auto-matic transmission shifts to P.If you shift the automatic transmission toN before switching off the engine, the auto-matic transmission remains in N even if adoor is opened.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by,for example:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting an automatic transmission out of
parking position PRshifting a manual transmission into neutralRstarting the engineThey could also operate vehicle equipment.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
i The electric parking brake carries out afunction check at regular intervals whenthe engine is switched off. Noises thatoccur are normal.
Engaging/releasing manually
EngagingX Push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,the ! red indicator lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.
i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the key is removed.
Parking 163
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
ReleasingX Pull handle :.
The red ! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
i You can only release the electric parkingbrake when the key is in position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.
Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is applied auto-matically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
standstill (vehicles with automatic trans-mission) orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary.In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver's door is open and the seat belt
is not fastenedRthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.
i The electric parking brake is not automat-ically applied if the engine is switched offby the ECO start/stop function.
Releasing automaticallyi The electric parking brake can only be
released automatically in vehicles withautomatic transmission.
The electric parking brake of your vehicle isreleased automatically when all of the follow-ing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt is fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
If the transmission is in position R, the tailgatemust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-
tion P or you have previously driven fasterthan 3 km/h.
Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 163).
i The vehicle is braked for as long as han-dle : of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle : is depressed, the greaterthe braking force.
During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release parking brake message
appearsRthe red ! indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster flashesWhen the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Parking up the vehicleIf you leave the vehicle parked up for longerthan four weeks, the battery may be damagedby exhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked up for longerthan six weeks, the vehicle may suffer dam-age as a result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.
164 ParkingDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Driving tips
General notes
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
ECO displayThe ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Con-sumption can be significantly influenced byyour driving style.
Example: ECO display
The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoastingThe percentage count is the mean value of thethree bar values. The three bars and the meanvalue begin at the value of 50%. A higher per-centage count indicates a more economicaldriving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption and a fixed percentagecount in the ECO display does not indicate afixed consumption figure.
In addition to driving style, the consumptionis affected by many other factors, such as:RloadRtyre pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRthe use of electrical consumersThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style takes thefollowing three categories into consideration:RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-
tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behav-
iour at all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes
- The bar empties: frequent braking
i An economical driving style involves driv-ing at a moderate engine speed.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendation.Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehi-
cles with automatic transmission).
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the motorway, only the bar for Con‐stant will change.
i The ECO display summarises the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. Therefore, there are
Driving tips 165
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
dynamic changes in the bars at the start ofa journey. During a prolonged driving time,these changes are smaller. For moredynamic changes, perform a manual reset.
For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 212).
Braking
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradientsChange into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. Take particularnote of this when driving a laden vehicle andwhen towing a trailer. For vehicles with auto-matic transmission, you need to have selec-ted manual drive program M(Y page 156).
i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS-TRONIC PLUS.
This will use the braking effect of the engine,so less braking will be required to prevent thevehicle from gaining speed. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.
i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon downhill gradients while the manualdrive program M is temporarily activated(vehicles with automatic transmission): theautomatic transmission may switch back tothe last active automatic drive program Eor S. The automatic transmission may shift
to a higher gear. This can reduce theengine's braking effect.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNINGThe braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot on the brake pedal while driving.This increases the braking distance and couldeven cause the braking system to fail. Thereis a risk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.
If heavy demands are made on the brakes, donot park the vehicle immediately. Drive on fora short while. This allows the airflow to coolthe brakes more quickly.If the brakes have been used only moderately,you should occasionally test their effective-ness. To do this, brake more firmly from ahigher speed, paying attention to traffic con-ditions. This improves the grip of the brakes.
Wet road surfacesIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after a car wash orafter driving through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmup the brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.
166 Driving tipsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
salt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
New brake pads/liningsNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometres of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only have brake pads/liningsfitted to your vehicle which have beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich correspond to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake pads/linings which have notbeen approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich are not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.
Driving on wet roads
AquaplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-planing occurring, even if:Ryou are driving at low speedsRthe tyres have adequate tread depthFor this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts andbrake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
front or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum per-missible water depth to be exceeded.These notes must be observed under allcircumstances. You could otherwise dam-age the engine, the electronics or the trans-mission.
If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in
still water is 25 cmRyou should drive no faster than walking
pace
Winter driving
General notes
G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.
G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.
Driving tips 167
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).
Driving with summer tyresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).
Slippery road surfaces
G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Vehicles with manual transmission:
shift to neutral.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control by
using corrective steering.You should drive particularly carefully on slip-pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.
i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 321).
Driving systems
Cruise control
Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account road,weather or traffic conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time, and for staying in thelane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed(e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads).Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or
accelerating can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle could thenskid.Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow.If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.
General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. You mustselect a lower gear in good time on long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer. For vehi-cles with automatic transmission, you needto have selected manual drive programM(Y page 156). By doing so, you will makeuse of the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 30 km/h.
168 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Cruise control leverYou can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is
selected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
TRONIC is selected.
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-
iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control
When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.In the multifunction display, the segmentsbetween the stored speed and the maximumspeed light up.
Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must be
released.Ryou are driving faster than 30 km/h.
RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-vening.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the selector lever must be in position D.Ron vehicles with manual transmission, a
gear must be engaged.Rcruise control must be selected.X To select cruise control: check whether
LIM indicator lamp ; is on or off.If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
X If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed
Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 30 km/h.X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ?.X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically braking the vehicle.
i Vehicles with manual transmission:Ralways drive at adequate, but not exces-
sive, engine speeds.Rchange gear in good time.Rif possible, do not change down several
gears at a time.
Driving systems 169
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Storing the current speed and calling upthe last stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up a stored speed and this is dif-ferent from the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or brakes. If you do not knowwhat the stored speed is, the vehicle mayaccelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an accident.Take the traffic conditions into accountbefore calling up the stored speed. If you donot know what the stored speed is, store thedesired speed again.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou =.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.
Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe set speed.X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
the desired speed is reached.X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored.X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
ments: briefly press the cruise controllever up : or down ? to the pressurepoint.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 km/h increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control leverbriefly up : or down ? beyond the pres-sure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 10 km/h increments.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards B.orX BrakeorX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow A.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp ; in the cruise control leverlights up.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake.Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h.RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rwhile driving a vehicle with manual trans-mission, you shift into neutral or depressthe clutch pedal for longer than six sec-onds.Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you
shift to a gear that is too high, and as aresult the engine speed is too low.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
you shift into position N while driving.If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.
i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.
170 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
SPEEDTRONIC
Important safety notesSPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so thatyou do not exceed the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly. Ifyou need additional braking, depress thebrake pedal repeatedly rather than continu-ously.If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. SPEED-TRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time, and for stay-ing in the lane.If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.
General notesYou can set a variable or permanent limitspeed:Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
areasRpermanent for long-term speed restric-
tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyresfitted (Y page 172)
i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the limit speedstored.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC
General notesWith the cruise control lever, you can operatecruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and vari-able SPEEDTRONIC.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
TRONIC is selected.You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.
: To store the current speed or a higherspeed
; LIM indicator lamp= To store the current speed and calling up
the last stored speed? To store the current speed or a lower
speedA To switch between cruise control or DIS-
TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC
Selecting variable SPEEDTRONICX Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isselected.
X Make sure that the accelerator pedal is notdepressed beyond the pressure point.
Driving systems 171
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Storing the current speedYou can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ?.The current speed is stored. For five sec-onds, the multifunction display shows thestored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h.The segments in the speedometer light upfrom the start of the scale up to the storedspeed.
Storing the current speed and calling upthe last stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou =.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise controllever up : to the pressure point for ahigher speed, or down ? for a lower speed.
orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
pressure point until the desired speed isset. Press the cruise control lever up : fora higher speed or down ? for a lowerspeed.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise con-trol lever up : past the pressure point for
a higher speed, or down ? for a lowerspeed.
orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed
beyond the pressure point until the desiredspeed is set. Press the cruise control leverup : for a higher speed or down ? for alower speed.
Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONICIt is not possible to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC by braking.There are several ways to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards B.orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isdeactivated.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selec-ted.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou depress the accelerator pedal beyond
the pressure point (kickdown), but only ifyour current speed does not differ by morethan 20 km/h from the stored speed. Youwill hear a warning tone if this is the case.Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if
you shift to a higher gear and as a result,the engine speed is too low.
i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.
Permanent SPEEDTRONICYou can use the on-board computer to limitthe speed permanently to a value between160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) andthe maximum speed (Y page 223).
172 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Shortly before the stored speed is reached, itappears in the multifunction display.Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active,even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,even if you depress the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown).
DISTRONIC PLUS
Important safety notes
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS-TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road andweather conditions or traffic conditions intoaccount. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehiclein front, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime, and for staying in the lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed(e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads).Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or
accelerating can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle could thenskid.Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow.DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired by:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
ing the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
for example, in multi-storey car parksIf DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate tothe speed stored.
Driving systems 173
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
This speed can:Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip roadRbe so high in the right lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the leftRbe so high in the left lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the rightIf there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.
General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS-TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.You must select a lower gear in good time onlong and steep downhill gradients, especiallyif the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. Forthis, you need to have selected manual driveprogram M(Y page 166). By doing so, you willmake use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. Itmaintains the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. Without your intervention, DIS-TRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately toincrease the distance to the vehicle driving infront, or take evasive action, provided it issafe to do so.The radar sensor system is switched off auto-matically in the vicinity of radio telescopefacilities (Y page 350).For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system must be:Ractivated (Y page 223)Roperational
i In some countries you must deactivatethe radar sensor system (Y page 223).For further information about the radar sen-sor system; see (Y page 350).
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and
there is no longer a vehicle in front orRthe vehicle ahead has not been detectedIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is drivingin front of you, it operates in the speed rangebetween 0 km/h and 200 km/h.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS on roads withsteep gradients.
Cruise control leverWith the cruise control lever, you can operateDISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-TRONIC.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS
is selected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
TRONIC is selected.
: To store the current speed or a higherspeed
; To set the specified minimum distance= LIM indicator lamp
174 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
? To store the current speed and calling upthe last stored speed
A To store the current speed or a lowerspeed
B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS andvariable SPEEDTRONIC
C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
Selecting DISTRONIC PLUSX Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off.
If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec-ted.
X If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow B.LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise controllever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec-ted.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,maintaining and calling up a speed
Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the fol-lowing activation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be running. It may take up
to two minutes of driving before DIS-TRONIC PLUS is ready for use.Rthe electric parking brake must be
released.RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-
vening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-
ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and the rear
doors must be closed.Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be
selected with the cruise control lever(Y page 175).
ActivatingTo activate while driving: you can only acti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS at speeds below20 km/h if the vehicle in front is detected andshown in the multifunction display. If the vehi-cle in front is no longer detected and dis-played, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off andyou will hear a tone.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ? or press it up : or down A.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup : or down A until the desired speedis set.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehi-cle in front has been detected and is shownin the multifunction display. If the vehicle infront is no longer detected and displayed,DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you willhear a tone.
i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactivemessage appears in the multifunction dis-play. The set distance to a slower-movingvehicle in front will then not be maintained.You will be driving at the speed you deter-mine by the position of the acceleratorpedal.
Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the speedometer
Driving systems 175
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments ; in the set speed range lightup.
i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments ; between speed of the vehicle infront : and stored speed = light up.
Assistance graphic in vehicles with a colour multi-function display: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
appears when the cruise control lever isactuated)
In the Assistance menu (Y page 217) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphic.X Select the Distance display function
using the on-board computer(Y page 217).
i You will see the stored speed for approx-imately five seconds when you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.
Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up a stored speed and this is dif-ferent from the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or brakes. If you do not know
what the stored speed is, the vehicle mayaccelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an accident.Take the traffic conditions into accountbefore calling up the stored speed. If you donot know what the stored speed is, store thedesired speed again.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever(Y page 174) towards you ?.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.
Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe set speed.
: To store the current speed or a higherspeed
; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed
X Press the cruise control lever up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUSis activated and adjusts the vehicle's speedto the new speed stored.
176 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise controllever up : or down ; to the pressurepoint.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 km/h increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control leverbriefly up : or down ; beyond the pres-sure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 10 km/h increments.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.
Setting the specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 175).
i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.
X To increase: turn control = in direc-tion ;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control = in direc-tion :.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivate DIS-TRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow =.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp ; in the cruise control leverlights up.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUSis not deactivated if you depress the accel-erator pedal.
Driving systems 177
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if
the vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 10 km/h and
there is no longer a vehicle in front, or if thevehicle in front is no longer detectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou switch off the radar sensor systemRyou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunc-tion display for approximately five seconds.In the Assistance menu (Y page 217) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphic.
: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator: current distance to
the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Distance display function
using the on-board computer(Y page 217).
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of abend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles which are not driving in the mid-dle of their lane
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicleswhich are not driving in the middle of theirlane. The distance to the vehicle in front willbe too short.
178 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Other vehicles changing lane
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the carriage-way, because of its narrow width. The dis-tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross-ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi-cle to pull away unintentionally.
HOLD function
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supplyRthe HOLD function is deactivated by the
accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. bya vehicle occupantRthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-pered withRthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivatethe HOLD function and secure the vehiclefrom rolling away.
Driving systems 179
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 180).
General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
slopesRwhen manoeuvring on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLDfunction is deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.
Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or if your seat
belt is fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or N on
vehicles with automatic transmissionRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Activating the HOLD function
Example: vehicles with colour multifunction displayX Make sure that the activation conditions
are met.X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.
i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
transmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles
with automatic transmission.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until : disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
parking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
i After a short period the vehicle is securedby the electric parking brake, thus relievingthe service brake.
180 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activa-ted and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastenedRthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRa system fault occursRthe power supply is not sufficient
Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf a fault occurs, then the transmission mayalso be shifted into position P automatically.
Vehicles with manual transmissionThe Brake immediately message can alsoappear in the multifunction display.X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
until the warning message in the multifunc-tion display goes out.The HOLD function is deactivated.
A horn will sound at regular intervals if youturn off the engine, take off your seat belt oropen the driver's door when the HOLD func-tion is activated. The horn alerts you to thefact that the HOLD function is still activated.If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tonebecomes louder. The vehicle cannot belocked until you have deactivated the HOLDfunction.
i Once you have switched off the engine,you cannot restart it until you have deacti-vated the HOLD function.
RACE START
Important safety notesRACE START enables optimum accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.Only activate RACE START on dedicated racecircuits.
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-cles.
Activation conditionsYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors, the bonnet and the tailgate are
closedRthe engine is running and the transmission,
traction control and engine are at operatingtemperatureRSPORT handling mode is activated
(Y page 66)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
pedal is depressed (left foot)Rthe transmission is in position D.Rdrive program M is selected (Y page 155).
Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.X Pull and hold both steering wheel gearshift
paddles.X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.
X Release both steering wheel gearshift pad-dles.
i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. TheRACE START not possible See Own‐er's Manual message appears in the mul-tifunction display.
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shiftpaddle (Y page 156).
orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel
shift paddle (Y page 156).The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the mul-tifunction display.
Driving systems 181
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within a few seconds, RACE START iscancelled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START cancelled message.
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunc-tion display.
i If the brake pedal is not released after ashort while, RACE START is cancelled. Themultifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message.
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The RACE START active message appearsin the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.Drive program S is activated. SPORT handlingmode remains activated.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activation condi-tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible or RACE START cancelledmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.
i After using it several times in short suc-cession, RACE START will be unavailableuntil a certain distance has been driven.
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
take account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime, and for staying in the lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accel-
erator pedal as far as is necessary.Raccelerate less when driving.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz implied warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the groundor be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snowchains if necessary.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substi-tute for your attention to the immediate sur-roundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.
! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-TRONIC does not detect such objects whenthey are in the immediate vicinity of thevehicle. You could damage the vehicle orthe objects.The sensors may not detect snow andobjects which absorb ultrasonic sources.Ultrasonic sources, such as an automaticcar wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
182 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK-TRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically ifyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift to position D, R or N on vehicles with
automatic transmissionRrelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.
Range of the sensors
General notesPARKTRONIC does not take into accountobstacles located:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons,
animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-
ing loads, tail sections or loading ramps ofgoods vehicles
: Example: sensors in the front bumper,left-hand side
Side view
Top view
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice andslush. Otherwise, they may not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 294).
Front sensors
Centre Approx. 100 cm
Corners Approx. 60 cm
Rear sensors
Centre Approx. 120 cm
Corners Approx. 80 cm
Minimum distance
Centre Approx. 20 cm
Corners Approx. 20 cm
If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.
Driving systems 183
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the centre air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted on the roof lining in the rear compart-ment.
Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness =light up.The gear lever position or the transmissionposition of the automatic transmission andthe direction in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.
Manual transmission:
Gear lever posi-tion
Warning display
Forwards gearorNeutral
Front area activated
Reverse gear, orthe vehicle is rollingbackwards
Rear and front areasactivated
Automatic transmission:
Transmission position
Warning display
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards
Rear and front areasactivated
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.
184 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the key to position 2 in theignition lock.
Towing a trailer! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-ures the minimum detection range to anobstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-pling.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.
Driving systems 185
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds,and the indicator lampin the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 294).X Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediatesurroundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.
G WARNINGThe vehicle will veer out when parking and cantake you onto sections of the oncoming lane.As a result, you may collide with other roadusers. There is a risk of an accident.When parking, pay attention to other roadusers. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancelthe Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tyres.
Active Parking Assist may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rparking or stopping prohibitionsRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRunsuitable surfacesParking tips:Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi-
ble past the parking space.Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown
or partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(Y page 184) warning messages during theparking procedure.
186 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Rat any time, you can intervene in the steer-ing procedure to correct it. Active ParkingAssist will then be cancelled.Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are fitted.Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.
General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. Active steering interventioncan assist you during parking.You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 182). When PARKTRONIC is switchedoff, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.
G WARNINGIf objects are located above the detectionrange, Active Parking Assist may start to steerinto the parking space too soon. As a result,you could cause a collision. There is a risk ofan accident.
If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop the vehicle and switch ActiveParking Assist off.
For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 183).Active Parking Assist does not support youparking in spaces that are parallel to thedirection of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a kerb stoneRthe parking space appears to be blocked,
for example by foliage or grass pavingblocksRthe range of movement is too smallRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle which is not clearly defined such as atree or a trailer
: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is activated automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde-pendently locates and measures parkingspaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 1.5 m wideRthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your
vehicle
i In the case of parking spaces that are atright angles to the direction of travel,please ensure that the parking space islong enough to accommodate your vehicle.
Driving systems 187
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, youwill see parking symbol ; as a status indi-cator in the instrument cluster. When a park-ing space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears.Active Parking Assist only displays parkingspaces on the front-passenger side as stand-ard. Parking spaces on the driver's side aredisplayed as soon as the turn signal on thedriver's side is activated. When parking on thedriver's side, this must remain switched onuntil you acknowledge the use of Active Park-ing Assist by pressing the a button on themultifunction steering wheel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 15 m away from it.
Parking
G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you by inter-vening actively in the steering. There is a riskof accident if you do not apply the brakesyourself.Always apply the brakes yourself when park-ing and manoeuvring.
Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces parallel to the directionof travel if:Rthe parking space is on a kerbstoneRthe parking space is apparently blocked,
for example by foliage or grass pavingblocksRthe range of movement is too smallRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle which is not clearly defined such as atree or a trailer
X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbolshows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift toreverse gear.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shiftinto position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.
orX To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.
X Release the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake
at all times. Do not exceed a maximumspeed of approximately 10 km/h whenreversing. Otherwise, Active Parking Assistwill be cancelled.
i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up asfar as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Manoeuvring may be required in tight park-ing spaces.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage forward gear Observe surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.Vehicles with automatic transmission: thePark Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.X Vehicles with manual transmission: while
the vehicle is stationary, shift to first gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission:select transmission position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.
188 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage reverse gear Observe surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.Vehicles with automatic transmission: thePark Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.X Additional transmission shifts may be nec-
essary.As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the Park Assist switched offmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.Active Parking Assist is then deactivated.PARKTRONIC is still available.
X Manoeuvre if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 184).Parking tips:Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the kerb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.Ryou can also engage forward gear prema-
turely. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should
a gear be changed too early, the parkingprocedure will be cancelled. A sensibleparking position can no longer be achievedfrom this position.
Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must not
be too low.Rthe border of the parking space must not
be too wide. The system manoeuvres thevehicle into a position at a maximum of 45°to the starting position in the parkingspace.Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 0.60 m
must be available.Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle using Active Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing
the street.X Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reverse gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.
orX To exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.
X Release the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
ready to brake at all times. Do not exceeda maximum speed of approximately
Driving systems 189
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
10 km/h when exiting a parking space.Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will becancelled.
X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the con-tinuous warning tone, if not before.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to first or reverse gear as requiredwhile the vehicle is stationary.Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift to position D or R as required while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appearsin the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you reverse after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.
X Drive forwards or reverse the vehicle, beingready to brake at all times.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.
X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist switched off messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available.
Cancelling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be cancelled atonce. The Park Assist cancelled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.
orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
centre console (Y page 185).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately cancelled.The Park Assist cancelled messageappears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is cancelled automati-cally if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake.Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible.Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h.Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails.
The ÷ warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking spacesymbol disappears and the multifunction dis-play shows the Park Assist cancelledmessage.When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, youmust steer again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.
Towing a trailerFor vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min-imum required length for parking spaces isslightly increased.If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,you should not use Active Parking Assist.Once the electrical connection is establishedbetween your vehicle and the trailer, ActiveParking Assist is no longer available. PARK-TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
190 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Reversing camera
Important safety notesThe reversing camera is only an aid. It is nota substitute for your attention to the imme-diate surroundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.Under the following circumstances, thereversing camera will not function, or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.
General notes
Reversing camera : is in the boot lid handle.The reversing camera extends, when it is acti-vated.The reversing camera is an optical parkingand manoeuvring aid. It uses guide lines to
show the area behind your vehicle in theAudio/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples ofreversing camera messages in theCOMAND display.
Activating/deactivating the reversingcameraX To activate: make sure that the key is in
position 2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"
setting is active in the audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate audiosystem/COMAND Online operatinginstructions.
X Engage reverse gear.Guide lines are used to show the areabehind the vehicle in the Audio/COMANDdisplay.
Function mode display for vehicles with COMANDOnline and a trailer tow hitchX To change the function mode in vehi-
cles with COMAND Online and trailer tow hitch: using the COMAND controller,select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"
Driving systems 191
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
function; see the separate COMAND Onlineoperating instructions.
orX Select symbol ; for the coupling up a
trailer function (see the separate COMANDOnline operating instructions).The symbol of the selected function is high-lighted.
To deactivate: the reversing camera is deac-tivated if you:Rselect transmission position P (vehicles
with automatic transmission)Rdrive forward ten metresRfor vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion, shift the transmission from R toanother position after 15 secondsRshift out of reverse gear (vehicles with man-
ual transmission) after 15 secondsRdrive forwards at a speed of over
10 km/h
Displays in the Audio/COMAND displayThe reversing camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thereversing camera in the following locations:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.
Lanes: White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)
; Yellow lane marking the course the tyreswill take at the current steering wheelangle, vehicle width including the outeredge of the wheel (dynamic)
= Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)
? Bumper
Guide lines? BumperA Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicleB Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicleC Vehicle centre axle (marker assistance)D Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicleThe lanes and guide lines are only displayedif you have engaged reverse gear.
192 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.
Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONICand COMAND Online: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC operational read-
iness indicator= Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND Online: when PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 182), additional operational readi-ness indicator ; appears in the COMANDdisplay.If the PARKTRONIC warning displaysare active or light up, warning displays : and= are also active or light up correspondinglyin the COMAND display.
Reverse parking functionX Make sure that the reversing camera is
activated and the "Reverse parking" func-tion is selected; see the separate operatinginstructions for the audio system/COMAND Online.The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Reversing straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel
: White lane indicating the route the vehiclewill take with the steering wheel straight
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
= Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle
X With the help of white lane :, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.
X Using the white lane as a guide, carefullyreverse until you reach the end position.Red guide line = is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angleX Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
Driving systems 193
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Turning the steering wheel: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its cur-rent position
; Parking space markingX While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-ing space until the red lane reaches parkingspace marking ;.
X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand reverse carefully.
Reversing with the steering wheel turned: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its cur-rent position
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactlyin front of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.
Driving to the final position: White lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its cur-rent position
; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the centre posi-
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle
; White lane indicating the route the vehiclewill take with the steering wheel straight
= End of parking spaceX Reverse carefully until you have reached
the end position.Red guide line : is then at end of parkingspace =. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.
"Coupling up a trailer" functionThis function is only available on vehicles witha trailer tow hitch and COMAND Online.
194 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guideline at a distance of approximately 1.0 mfrom the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar= Ball couplingX Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that
it is slightly higher than ball coupling =.X Position the vehicle centrally in front of
trailer drawbar ;.
: Ball coupling; Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 0.25 m from the ball coupling= Trailer drawbar locating aid? Trailer drawbarA Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"
functionX Select symbol A with the Audio/COMAND
controller; see the separate operatinginstructions for the audio system/COMAND Online.The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-ted. The distance specifications now only
apply to objects that are at the same levelas the ball coupling.
X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar locating aid = points approx-imately in the direction of trailer draw-bar ?.
X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ?touches red guide line ;.
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 201).
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys such as on motorwaysand trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/hto 180 km/h range.If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-centration on the part of the driver, it sug-gests taking a break.
Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannotalways detect fatigue or lapses in concentra-tion until too late or not at all. The system isnot a substitute for a well-rested and atten-tive driver.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristicsRjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of
day, length of journeyThe functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted, and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side wind
Driving systems 195
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slower
than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/hRif you are currently using COMAND Online
or making a telephone call with COMANDOnlineRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 219).If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes afteryour journey has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: Take a break!message appears in the multifunction dis-play.
X If necessary, take a break.X Press the a or % button to confirm
the message.On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. This will onlyhappen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detectstypical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap-ses in concentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and startsassessing your tiredness again when you con-tinue your journey if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.
Speed Limit Assist
General notesSpeed Limit Assist shows you detected speedlimits in the multifunction display. Data fromthe navigation system is also used for thispurpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speedlimit or the end of a speed limit is detected,it is shown in the multifunction display. IfSpeed Limit Assist does not detect any trafficsigns, the speed limit from the digital roadmap is taken and shown in the display.Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signswith a camera attached behind the top of thewindscreen.
: Speed Limit Assist camera
Important safety notesSpeed Limit Assist is only an aid and does notalways detect traffic signs specifying themaximum permissible speed. Traffic signsalways have priority over the Speed LimitAssist display.The system may be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from
oncoming trafficRthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinityof the cameraRthe traffic signs are covered, for instance
by dirt, snow or trees
196 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminatedRthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for
instance near roadworks or on multi-laneroads
Information in the multifunction displayBriefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction displayX Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning
function using the on-board computer(Y page 218).A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or theend of a speed limit appears in the multi-function display for around five seconds assoon as it is detected. Any other informa-tion in the multifunction display is hiddenfor this period.
: Maximum permissible speed (example); Maximum permissible speed for vehicles
subject to the restriction in the additionalsign (example)
= Additional character in fog? Speed Limit Assist is available and
switched on
Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction displayX Display the assistance graphic using the
on-board computer (Y page 217).A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or theend of a speed limit appears in the multi-function display as soon as it is detected.
The traffic sign indicating a speed limit : isgenerally displayed until:Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed
limit is detected.Ryou make a turn.Ryou leave or enter a town.Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway,
country road).Ryou have travelled a certain minimum dis-
tance without the traffic sign being repea-ted or detected again.
Lane Tracking package
General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 198) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 199).
Blind Spot Assist
Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot areaRif you overtake these with a difference in
speed in excess of 12 km/hRor if they approach with a great relative
speed and overtake youAs a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warndrivers in these situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and maintain a safe distance at the sideof the vehicle.
Driving systems 197
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.
General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from speeds of30 km/h. A warning display in the exteriormirrors draws your attention to vehiclesdetected in the monitored area. If you thenswitch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lane, you will also receive an opticaland audible collision warning. For this pur-pose, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in therear bumper.The radar sensor system is switched off auto-matically in the vicinity of radio telescopefacilities (Y page 350).For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system must be:Ractivated(Y page 223)Roperational
i In some countries you must deactivatethe radar sensor system (Y page 223).For further information about the radar sen-sor system; see (Y page 350).
Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
ing the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snowRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
motorcycle or a bicycleRvery wide lanesRnarrow lanesRvehicles not driving in the middle of their
laneRbarriers or other road boundariesVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For thispurpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensorsin the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if the vehicles are driving on theinner side of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, forexample lorries, for a prolonged time.
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Theradar sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of theradar sensors checked at a qualified special-ist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may other-wise not work properly.
198 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the mon-itoring range are then not indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicatorlamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speedsabove 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes outand Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre-sponding side lights up in red. This warningalways occurs when a vehicle enters the blindspot monitoring range from behind or fromthe side. When you overtake a vehicle, thewarning only occurs if the difference in speedis less than 12 km/h.The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is thendeactivated.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.
Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, detected vehiclesare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Activating Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 223) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 219) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailerIf you attach a trailer, make sure that you havecorrectly established the electrical connec-tion. This can be accomplished by checkingthe trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is thendeactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yel-low in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears inthe multifunction display.
i You can deactivate the indicator lamps inthe exterior mirrors.To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if:Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.Rthe engine is not running.Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
has been established.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera atthe top of the windscreen. Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andwarns you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.
Driving systems 199
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
: Lane Keeping Assist camera
If you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display unit Speed-/odometer func-tion (Y page 220), Lane Keeping Assist isactive starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.
Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist cannot always clearlyidentify lane markings.In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep in lane, especially if LaneKeeping Assist alerts you.
G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always steer, apply the brakes or acceleratethe vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep-ing Assist alerts you.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon-sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,
for vehicle speed, for braking in good time,and for staying in the lane.Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-cle in its lane.The system may be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflection from other vehicles(e.g. if the road surface is wet)Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam-
aged or covered, for instance by a stickerin the vicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions
on the roadA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Activating Lane Keeping AssistX Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-
board computer; to do so, select Stand‐ard or Adaptive(Y page 219).If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h andlane markings are detected, the lane mark-ings in the assistance graphics display(Y page 217) are shown in green.
200 Driving systemsDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed fora certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this case, the warnings are suppressed fora certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognises certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
way.Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Towing a trailer
Notes on towing a trailer
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot on the brake pedal while driving.This increases the braking distance and could
even cause the braking system to fail. Thereis a risk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle/trailercombination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even overturn.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-tion by increasing speed. Decrease yourspeed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-essary.
G WARNINGIf the maximum the permissible load for a car-rier system is exceeded, the carrier couldcome loose from the vehicle and endangerother road users. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never exceed the permissible noseweightwhen using a carrier.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.
Trailer towing is not permissible on the fol-lowing models:RA 45 AMG 4MATICRVehicles with the AMG Sports packageIf you exceed the maximum permissible nose-weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball cou-pling, the following may become damaged:Ryour vehicleRthe trailerRthe ball couplingRthe trailer tow hitchThe vehicle/trailer combination couldbecome unstable.If the noseweight used is lower than the min-imum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/
Towing a trailer 201
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
trailer combination could also become unsta-ble.To avoid hazardous situations:Rmake sure to check the noseweight before
each journey.Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-
sible to the maximum noseweight.Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible
noseweight.Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the
minimum permissible trailer drawbar nose-weight.
When reversing the vehicle towards thetrailer, make sure there is nobody betweenthe trailer and the vehicle.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towingvehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer
The applicable permissible values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the identification plates of the trailer tow
hitch and the trailerRon the vehicle identification plateIf the values differ, the lowest value applies.You will find the values approved by the man-ufacturer on the vehicle identification platesand those for the towing vehicle under "Tech-nical data" (Y page 349).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradi-
ent-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis can impair the vehicle's handling char-acteristics. Adapt your style of driving accord-ingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive care-fully.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weather con-ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis-sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina-tion.
General notesX When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure
on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for amaximum load; see the tyre pressure tablein the fuel filler flap (Y page 321).
Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK-TRONIC (Y page 182) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 197) availability is limited or not avail-able at all.
i The height of the ball coupling changeswith the load of the vehicle. If necessary,use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw-bar.
You will find fitting dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 348).
Driving tipsi Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi-
lisation (Y page 68).The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, checkthe trailer's documents to see what the max-imum permitted speed is. Observe the legally
202 Towing a trailerDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
prescribed maximum speed in the relevantcountry.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max-imum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technicaldata" section to find out whether this appliesto your vehicle. If you utilise any of the addedmaximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,the vehicle/trailer combination may notexceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h forreasons concerning the operating permit.This also applies in countries in which thepermissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer and it willconsume more fuel.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. For vehicleswith automatic transmission, you need tohave selected manual drive programM(Y page 156).
i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS-TRONIC PLUS.
This will use the braking effect of the engine,so less braking will be required to maintainvehicle speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If youneed additional braking, depress the brakepedal repeatedly rather than continuously.
i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon downhill gradients while the manualdrive program M is temporarily activated(vehicles with automatic transmission): theautomatic transmission may switch back tothe last active automatic drive program Eor S. The automatic transmission may shiftto a higher gear. This can reduce theengine's braking effect.
Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not countersteer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
cle in front than when driving without atrailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbing
capabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engine,and consequently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decrease with increas-ing altitude.
Folding out the ball coupling
G WARNINGIf you release the ball coupling or it does notengage correctly when folding in, it will swingout. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,there is an increased risk of an accident andinjury.Only release the ball coupling if the pivotingrange is unobstructed. Always make sure thatthe ball coupling engages when folding in.
Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,you must fold out the ball coupling.The release wheel is located behind the left-hand side trim panel in the boot.
Towing a trailer 203
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
X To open the cover: turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold down cover ; andremove it.
X Pull out release wheel =.X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far
as it will go.The ball coupling disengages and folds outbehind the rear bumper. Indicatorlamp ? flashes.
G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly engaged,the trailer can detach. There is a risk of anaccident.Always engage the ball coupling as described.
X Pull the ball coupling in the direction of thearrow until it engages in a vertical position.Indicator lamp ? goes out. The powersocket folds down automatically.The multifunction display shows theCheck trailer hitch lock display mes-sage until the ball coupling is engaged.
X Remove the protective covering from theball coupling and store it in a safe place.
X Make sure that the ball of the ball couplingis clean and that it is either greased or dry(grease free), depending on the instruc-tions for the trailer.
Coupling up a trailerX Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
tion P.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.X Couple up the trailer.X Establish the electric connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.X Check that the trailer lighting system is
working.A trailer that is connected is recognisedonly when the electrical connection isestablished correctly and when the lightingsystem is working properly. The function ofother systems, such as ESP® or PARK-TRONIC also depends on this.
Uncoupling a trailer
G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-run brake, you could trap your hand between
204 Towing a trailerDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This posesa risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with anengaged overrun brake. Otherwise, yourvehicle could be damaged by the rebound-ing of the overrun brake.
! Remove the installed adapter cablebefore folding in the ball coupling. Other-wise, damage may occur to the rearbumper and the adapter cable.
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-tion P.
X Apply the electric parking brake.X Secure the trailer against rolling away.X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
Folding in the ball coupling
G WARNINGIf you release the ball coupling or it does notengage correctly when folding in, it will swingout. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,there is an increased risk of an accident andinjury.Only release the ball coupling if the pivotingrange is unobstructed. Always make sure thatthe ball coupling engages when folding in.
X Fold the ball coupling back in if you are notusing the trailer tow hitch.
X Place the protective covering on the ballcoupling.
The release wheel is located behind the left-hand side trim panel in the boot.
X To open the cover: turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold down cover ; andremove it.
X Pull out release wheel =.X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far
as it will go.The ball coupling disengages and folds outbehind the rear bumper. Indicatorlamp ? flashes.
Towing a trailer 205
Driv
ing
and
park
ing
Z
X Press the ball coupling in the direction ofthe arrow until it engages behind thebumper.Indicator lamp ? goes out and the mes-sage in the multifunction display disap-pears.
Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a
power rating of up to 240 W to the perma-nent power supply and with a power ratingof up to 180 W to the power supply that isswitched on via the ignition lock.The trailer battery may not be charged fromthe power supply.
X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lockto position 2 or 0 respectively.
When it leaves the factory, your vehicle'strailer socket is equipped with a permanentpower supply and a power supply that isswitched on via the ignition lock.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.The power supply that is switched on via theignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin10.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low vehicle supplyvoltage and after six hours at the latest.You can find more information about instal-ling the trailer electrics at a qualified special-ist workshop.
Bulb failure indicator for LED lampsi If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an
error message may appear in the multi-function display even if there is no fault. Thereason for the error message could be thatthe current has fallen below the minimumof 50 mA.
To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failureindicator, each LED chain in the trailer lightingmust be guaranteed a minimum current of50 mA.
Trailer with 7-pin connector
General notesTrailer with 7-pin connector: you can con-nect to the 13-pin socket on the ball couplingusing an adapter or, if necessary, an adaptercable. Both can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Fitting the adapter! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
play so that the cable cannot becomedetached when cornering.
! Remove the installed adapter cablebefore folding in the ball coupling. Other-wise, damage may occur to the rearbumper and the adapter cable.
X Open the socket cover.X Insert the plug connector with lug : into
groove = on the socket. Turn bayonet con-nection ; clockwise to the stop.
X Let the cover engage.X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
206 Towing a trailerDr
ivin
g an
d pa
rkin
g
Useful information ............................ 208Important safety notes .................... 208Displays and operation .................... 208Menus and submenus ...................... 211Display messages ............................. 229Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 257
207
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.
G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognise functionrestrictions relevant to safety. The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be impaired. Thereis a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.
You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only shows messagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at all
times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 30).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-trol knob.The brightness control knob is on the bottomleft of the instrument cluster (Y page 30).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
or anti-clockwise.If the light switch is set to Ã, T orL, the brightness is dependant uponthe brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.
Coolant temperature gaugeThe coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side.The reading may rise up to 120 † below nor-mal driving conditions if the coolant has beenfilled correctly.At high outside temperatures and when driv-ing uphill, the coolant temperature may riseto the end of the scale.
Rev counter! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
Doing so will damage the engine.The red band in the rev counter indicates theengine's overrevving range.
208 Displays and operationOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.The outside temperature display is in the mul-tifunction display.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.
Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 168):
The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated
(Y page 171):The segments light up from the start of thescale to the selected limit speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 173):
One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
: Multifunction display; Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep-
arate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turn
the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.
Displays and operation 209
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:RScrolls through listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects a
stored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel(telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber
9
:
Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu,
starts rapid scrolling through thephone book
a RConfirms selection/display mes-sageRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone bookand starts dialling the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at thedesired station
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a callRExits telephone book/redial
memory
6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory
WX
RAdjusts the volume
8 RMute
Back button
% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off LINGUATRONIC;
see the separate operatinginstructionsRHides display messages/calls
up the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redial
memory
% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in
the Trip menu
Multifunction display
Multifunction display (example: vehicles with auto-matic transmission): Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 220); Time= Text field
210 Displays and operationOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
? Menu barA Drive program (Y page 152)B Transmission position (Y page 152)X To show the menu bar ?: press the= or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.Text field = shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.
i You can set the time using the audio sys-tem or COMAND Online; see the separateoperating instructions.
The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation, for
manual transmission(Y page 151) or automatic trans-mission (Y page 156)
XjY Active Parking Assist(Y page 186)
¯ Cruise control (Y page 168)È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 171)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 110)¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 146)ë HOLD function (Y page 179)120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed
exceeded (only for certain coun-tries)
Menus and submenus
Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 209).Depending on the equipment fitted in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 211)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 213)RAudio menu (Y page 214)
RTel (telephone) menu (Y page 215)RAssist (Assistance) menu (Y page 217)RServ. menu (Y page 219)RSettings menu (Y page 220)RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 226)The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightlyin vehicles with Audio 5, Audio 20 and in vehi-cles with COMAND Online. The examplesgiven in this Owner's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND Online.
Trip menu
Standard display
X Press and hold the % button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withtrip meter : and total distancerecorder ; is shown.
Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"
Example: "From start" trip computer: Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumption
Menus and submenus 211
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to selectFrom start or From reset.
The values in the From start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilstthe values in the From reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 213).The From start trip computer is automati-cally reset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded.The From reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hoursor 99,999 kilometres.
ECO display
Example: ECO displayX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 165).
Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to selectcurrent fuel consumption ; (not for AMGvehicles) and approximate range :.
The approximate range that can be coveredis calculated according to your current drivingstyle and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, the display shows a vehicle beingrefuelled C instead of the range.
Digital speedometer
: Gearshift recommendation, manual trans-mission (Y page 151) or automatic trans-mission (Y page 156)
; Digital speedometer
Gearshift recommendation : is not given onAMG vehicles.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
212 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Resetting values
Example: resetting the "From start" trip computer
You can reset the values of the following func-tions:Rtrip meterR"From start" trip computerR"From reset" trip computerRECO displayX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.X Press the a button.X Press the : button to select Yes and
press a to confirm.
i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From start" trip computer, the values inthe ECO display are also reset.
Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructionsX Switch on the audio system or COMAND
Online; see the separate operating instruc-tions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Navi menu.
In the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.
Route guidance not active
: Direction of travel; Current road
Activating route guidance
No change of direction announced
: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? Symbol indicating "follow the road's
course"
Change of direction announced without alane recommendation
: Road to which the change of directionleads
; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol = for the change of directionand distance graphic ;. This shortenstowards the top of the display as you
Menus and submenus 213
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
approach the point of the announced changeof direction.
Change of direction announced with alane recommendation
Example: change of direction announced with lanerecommendation (colour multifunction display): Road to which the change of direction
leads; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display= New lane during a change of direction? Lane continues through change of direc-
tionA Lane recommendationB Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display anew lane recommendation = for the nextchange of direction. During the change ofdirection, additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.
Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemRO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.RNew route... or Calculating route:
calculating a new routeROff map or Off road: the vehicle position
is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position).RNo route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position
i The memory position is only displayedalong with station ; if this has beenstored.
X Switch on the audio system or COMANDOnline and select Radio; see the separateoperating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.
X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.
If no station list is received:X To select a station using the station
search: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.
i For information on changing wavebandand storing stations, see the separate oper-ating instructions.
i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-ing); see the separate operating instruc-tions.
214 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Audio player or audio media operation
Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current track
Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment fitted in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
Online and select audio CD, audio DVD orMP3 mode; see the separate operatinginstructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until the desired trackhas been reached.If you press and hold the 9 or : but-ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.Not all audio devices or media support thisfunction.
If track information is stored on the audioplayer or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).
TV operation
i If channel : has been stored, the systemdisplays the associated preset as well.
X Switch on COMAND Online and select TV;see the separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select a stored channel: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.
X To select a channel from the channel list: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.
i To store a TV channel, see the separateoperating instructions.
Video DVD operation
Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current sceneX Switch on COMAND Online and select
video DVD; see the separate operatinginstructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desired scenehas been reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehicle
Menus and submenus 215
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
while driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on your mobile phone and audio
system or COMAND Online, see the sepa-rate operating instructions.
X Place a mobile phone in the mobile phonebracket (Y page 279), or establish a Blue-tooth® connection with the audio systemor COMAND Online (see the separate oper-ating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has
been placed in the mobile phone bracketand the PIN has not been entered.When you enter your PIN via the mobilephone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio systemor COMAND Online, the mobile phonesearches for a network.RTelephone ready or the name of the net-
work provider: the mobile phone has founda network and is ready to receive.RTelephone No service: there is no net-
work available or the mobile phone issearching for a network.
i You can obtain further information aboutsuitable mobile phones and connectingmobile phones via Bluetooth®:Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Accepting a call
Example: incoming callX Press the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.If someone calls you when you are in theTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.If you are not in the Tel menu, you can stillaccept a call.
Rejecting or ending a callX Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel.If you are not in the Tel menu, you can stillreject or end a call.
Dialling a number from the phone bookX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the9 or : button for longer than onesecond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a buttonto start dialling.
orX If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.
216 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
X Press the 9 or : button to select thenumber you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-ling.
orX If you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
RediallingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialled in the redial memory.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ling.orX If you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
In the Assist. menu, you have the followingoptions:RShowing the assistance graphicRShowing Speed Limit Assist and activat-
ing/deactivating its message functionRActivating/deactivating ESP®
RActivating/deactivating the distance warn-ing function
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTRActivating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistRActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Showing the assistance graphicX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectAssistance graphic.
X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows the DIS-TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis-tance graphic (Y page 175).
The assistance graphic can display the statusof and information from other driving systemsor driving safety systems.The assistance graphic shows:Rthe è symbol when the rear window
wiper (Y page 118) is activatedRthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 195) is deactivatedRthe lane markings as bright lines when Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 199) is activatedRthe Ä symbol when Speed Limit Assist
(Y page 196) is operational and the mes-sage function is activatedThe assistance graphic can also displaytraffic signs that are detected and indicatespeed limits.Rthe æ symbol when the distance warn-
ing function (Y page 62) is deactivated
Menus and submenus 217
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Speed Limit Assist
Displaying Speed Limit AssistX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectSpeed Limit Assist.
X Press the a button.Under certain conditions, detected speedlimits are shown in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 196).
Activating/deactivating the Speed LimitAssist message functionX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectSpeed Limit Assist.
X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows SpeedLimit Assist.
X Press the : button.The current selection is displayed.
X To activate or deactivate: press a.If the Speed Limit Assist message functionis activated, a detected speed limit is auto-matically displayed for five seconds. Otheritems in the multifunction display are notshown during this time.When Speed Limit Assist is operational andthe message function is activated, theassistance graphic shows the Ä sym-bol.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion in the description of ESP (Y page 65).
G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelDeactivating/activating ESP® on AMG vehi-cles (Y page 66).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 65).X Start the engine.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectESP.
X Press the a button.X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.ESP® is deactivated if the å warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 260).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 230).
Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectDistance warning.
X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.When the distance warning function isdeactivated, the æ symbol appears inthe multifunction display in the assistancegraphics display.
218 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 62).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectATTENTION ASSIST.
X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,the é symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance graphics dis-play.
For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 195).
Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectBlind Spot Assist.
X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.
For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 197).When the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deactivated message is shown, the radarsensors are deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 223).
Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectLane Keeping Assist.
X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lane mark-ings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.
For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 199).
Service menu
In the Serv. menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in the mes-
sage memory (Y page 229)RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning
system (Y page 323)RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 289)
Menus and submenus 219
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu, you have the followingoptions:Rchanging the instrument cluster settingsRchanging the light settingsRchanging the vehicle settingsRchanging the auxiliary heating settings
(Y page 224)Rchanging the convenience settingsRrestoring the factory settings
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-tanceYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles or kil-ometres.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDisplay unit Speed-/odometer: func-tion.You will see the selected setting km ormiles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe total distance recorder and the trip
meter
Rthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi
menuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display
Switching the additional speedometeron/offOnly vehicles with manual transmission havethis function.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Dig. speedo [mph]: function.You will see the selected setting: Activa‐ted or Deactivated.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
i The speed is displayed in mph.
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: thisfunction is unavailable.
The Dig. speedo [mph] function allows youto choose whether the status area in the mul-tifunction display always shows the speed inmph instead of the outside temperature.
Selecting the permanent display functioni Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this
function is unavailable.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
220 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
X Press the : or 9 button to select thePermanent display: function.You will see the selected setting: outside temperature or Dig. speedo [mph].
X Press the a button to save the setting.
i The speed is displayed in mph.
Lights
Switching the daytime driving lights on/offThe Daytime driving lights function canonly be switched on with the engine turnedoff.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDaytime driving lights function.If the Daytime driving lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andthe W symbol in the multifunction dis-play are shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime driving lights(Y page 105).
Switching the Intelligent Light Systemon/offX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theIntell. Light System function.If the Intell. Light Sys. function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theL symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Intell. Light Systemfunction, you activate the following functions:Rmotorway modeRactive light functionRcornering light functionRextended range foglampsIf you set the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the right/left, the multifunctiondisplay shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic display messageinstead of the Intell. Light Sys. functionin the Lights submenu (Y page 221).Further information on the Intelligent LightSystem (Y page 108).
Setting the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the left/rightX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function.You will see the selected setting: Right-side traffic or Left-side traffic.
X Press the a button to save the setting.If you change the setting, conversion doesnot take place until the next time the vehi-cle is stationary.
This function is only available on vehicles withthe Intelligent Light System.You can use this function to switch betweensymmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam(Y page 104).If you set the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the right/left, then motorwaymode and the extended range foglamps areunavailable.You can also have the dipped-beam head-lamps set for driving on the right/left at a
Menus and submenus 221
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe Intelligent Light System.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAdapt. main beam function.If the Adapt. main beam function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information about Adaptive High-beam Assist, see (Y page 110).
Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAmb. light +/- function.You will see the selected setting.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Off toLevel 5 (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save thesetting.
Activating/deactivating the surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offIf you have activated the Surround light‐ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the key. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 105).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the tailgate,the exterior lighting goes off after15 seconds.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theSurround lighting function.When the Surround lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
position 0 in the ignition lock.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:Rside lampsRfoglamps
222 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Rdipped-beam headlampsRdaytime driving lightsRsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Lighting delayed sw.-off function, the interior lighting remains onfor 20 seconds after you remove the key fromthe ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLighting delayed sw.-off function.If the Lighting delayed sw.-off func-tion has been switched on, the vehicle inte-rior is displayed in orange in the multifunc-tion display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Setting permanent SPEEDTRONICX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLimit speed (winter tyres): function.You will see the current setting.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to adjust
permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments often (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off set-ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONICoff.
X Press the a button to store the entry.
Using the Limit speed (winter tyres)function, you can set permanent SPEED-TRONIC (Y page 172).
Switching the automatic locking featureon/offX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAutomatic door locks function.When the Automatic door locks func-tion is activated, the vehicle doors are dis-played in orange in the multifunction dis-play.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Automatic door locksfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 15 km/h.For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 81).
Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking confirmationIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the & symbol in the multifunction dis-play lights up orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
Menus and submenus 223
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
X Press the 9 or : button to selectRadar sensor (See Owner's Man.).You will see the selected setting: Activa‐ted or Deactivated.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
i In some countries you must deactivatethe radar sensor system. For further infor-mation, see (Y page 350).
If the radar sensor system is switched off,Blind Spot Assist is deactivated(Y page 197).
Heating
Changing the departure timeX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select
theHeating submenu.X Press a to confirm.
You will see the selected setting.X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select A,B or Change C.
X Press a to confirm.You can now change the departure time.
X Press the = or ; button to select thedisplay to be changed: hours, minutes.
X Press the : or 9 button to set theselected display.
X Press the a button to store the entry.The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliaryheating button lights up.
Selecting the departure time or deactivat-ing a selected departure timeX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theHeating submenu.
X Press a to confirm.You will see the selected setting.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select one of thethree departure times or Timer off (notimer active).
X Press a to confirm.If a departure time is selected, the yellowindicator lamp lights up on the auxiliaryheating button.
Changing the departure timeOnly vehicles with auxiliary heating(Y page 134) have this function.In the Heating submenu, you can select astored departure time or change a departuretime.The auxiliary heating timer function calcu-lates the switch-on time according to the out-side temperature so that the vehicle is pre-heated by the departure time. When thedeparture time is reached, the auxiliary heat-ing continues to heat for a further fiveminutes and then switches off. The auxiliaryheating adopts the THERMATIC orTHERMOTRONIC temperature setting.You can switch off the auxiliary heating byusing the remote control or the auxiliary heat-ing button on the centre console.
G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficientventilation is not possible, toxic exhaustfumes can enter the vehicle, especially car-bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. inenclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck insnow. There is a risk of fatal injuries.You should switch off the auxiliary heating inenclosed spaces which do not have an extrac-tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle isstuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliaryheating running, keep the exhaust pipe andthe area around the vehicle clear of snow. Toguarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle away fromthe wind.
G WARNINGWhen the auxiliary heating is switched on,parts of the vehicle can become very hot.
224 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Flammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system for extendedperiods. There is a risk of fire.When the auxiliary heating is switched on,make sure that no flammable material cancome into contact with hot vehicle compo-nents.
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-tion draws on the vehicle battery. After youhave heated or ventilated the vehicle amaximum of two times, drive for a longerdistance.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularlyonce a month for about ten minutes.
Comfort
Switching belt adjustment on/offX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theBelt adjustment function.If the Belt adjustment function is activa-ted, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orangein the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 47).
Switching the fold in mirrors when lock-ing function on/offThis function is only available on vehicles witha memory function (Y page 101).When you activate the Auto. fold-in mir‐rors function, the exterior mirrors are foldedin when the vehicle is locked.When you unlock the vehicle and then open adoor, the exterior mirrors fold out again.If you have switched on the Auto. fold-in mirrors function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door(Y page 99), they will not fold out automati-cally. The exterior mirrors can then only befolded out using the button on the door.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAuto. fold-in mirrors function.If the Auto. fold-in mirrors function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Resetting to factory settingsX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theFactory setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm.The Reset all settings? messageappears.
X Press the : or 9 button to selectNo or Yes.
X Press the a button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected Yes , the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:the Limit speed (winter tyres): func-tion in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only beset in the VEHICLE submenu. If you want toreset the Daytime driving lights: in theLight submenu, you must turn the key in theignition lock to position 1.
Menus and submenus 225
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
AMG menu in AMG vehicles
AMG displays
: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.Upshift indicator UP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UP= fades out other mes-sages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †,oil temperature ? is shown in blue. Avoidusing the full output of the engine during thistime.If the transmission fluid temperature is below50 †, oil temperature B is shown in blue.Avoid using the full output of the engine dur-ing this time.
SETUP
: Drive program (C/S/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
mode (SPORT)
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
SETUP is displayed.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting the RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the functionon public roads.
: Lap; RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the key is in position2 in the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
226 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
X Press the = or ; button to selectInterm. Time.
X Press a to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.
Starting a new lap
: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Press a to confirm New Lap.
i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X Press the % button on the steeringwheel.
X Confirm Yes with a.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stopthe vehicle and turn the key to position 1 inthe ignition lock. If you turn the key to position2 or 3 and then press a to confirmStart, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button to selectReset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Press a to confirm Reset.Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-function display.
X Press the : button to select Yes andpress the a button to confirm.All laps are deleted.
Overall evaluation
: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.
Menus and submenus 227
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Lap evaluation
: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select adifferent lap evaluation.
228 Menus and submenusOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages
General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differfrom the symbols in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Owner's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 179) and parking (Y page 162).
Hiding display messagesX Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.
Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 messages.X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 229
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷currently unavail‐able See Owner's Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hillstart assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavail-able.The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements, at a speed above 20 km/h.If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷inoperative See Owner's Manual
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assistand ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay also have failed.In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
230 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷currently unavail‐able See Owner's Manual
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable.The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements, at a speed above 20 km/h.If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 231
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷inoperative See Owner's Manual
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
T!÷inoperative See Owner's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-lisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock, for example, if you brake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
232 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!Release parking brake
The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake isnot fulfilled (Y page 163).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.
The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake (Y page 163).
!Parking brake See Owner's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lampare lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency
release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerateslightly more when pulling away.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electricparking brake automatically (Y page 163).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 233
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warninglamp is lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 325).X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicatorlamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brakehas been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency
release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerateslightly more when pulling away.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electricparking brake automatically (Y page 163).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
234 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lampflashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!Parking brake inop‐erative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicatorlamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brakehas been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.X Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warninglamp is lit.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!Turn on the igni‐tion to release the parking brake
The red ! indicator lamp lights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
Display messages 235
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
JBrake immediately
Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurredwhile the HOLD function was activated.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-pears.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).You can restart the engine.
JCheck brake fluid level
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNINGThe braking efficiency may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault.
#Check brake pad wear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFEinoperative See Owner's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
236 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFEFunctions cur‐rently limited See Owner's Manual
Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:Rthe radar sensor cover in the radiator trim is dirty.Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out.Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Clean the radar sensor cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 294).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 66).
PRE-SAFEFunctions limited See Owner's Manual
Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal mayalso have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belttongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle.Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts(Y page 49).
ý If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belttongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.
G WARNINGA seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not beenengaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide theintended level of protection.This poses an increased risk of injury.X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts (Y page 47).Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts(Y page 49).
Display messages 237
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6Restraint sys. mal‐function Consult workshop
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.
G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on occupant safety (Y page 40).
6Front left malfunc‐tion Consult work‐shop or Front right malfunction Consult workshop
SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6Rear left malfunc‐tion Consult work‐shop or Rear right malfunction Con‐sult workshop
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
238 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6Rear centre mal‐function Consult workshop
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6Left windowbag mal‐function Consult workshop or Right windowbag malfunc‐tion Consult work‐shop
There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.
G WARNINGThe left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionallyor, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
bLeft cornering light or Right cor‐nering light
The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLeft dipped beam or Right dipped beam
The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bTrailer left tail lamporTrailer right tail lamp
The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 239
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
bTrailer left indi‐cator or Trailer right indicator
The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bTrailer brake lamp
The trailer brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bRear left indica‐tor or Rear right indicator
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bFront left indica‐tor or Front right indicator
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLeft mirror indica‐tor or Right mir‐ror indicator
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isfaulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bThird brake lamp
The third brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLeft brake lamp or Right brake lamp
The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
240 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
bLeft-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLeft main beam or Right main beam
The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bNumber plate lamp
The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bFront foglamp left or Front foglamp right
The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bRear fog lamp
The rear foglamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bFront left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp
The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bReversing light
The reversing lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 241
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
bLeft tail lamp or Right tail lamp
The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLeft daytime driv‐ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp
The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 112).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bIntell. Light Sys‐tem inoperative
The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain availablewithout the Intelligent Light System.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bMalfunction See Owner's Manual
The exterior lighting is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.X Check the fuses (Y page 314).X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bAUTO lights inoper‐ative
The light sensor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bSwitch off lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to Ã.
242 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again messageis displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+Top up coolant See Owner's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doingso (Y page 288).
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.
? The fan motor is faulty.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Display messages 243
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?Coolant Stop vehi‐cle Switch engine off
The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGNever drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engineis overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, whichcan occur just by opening the bonnet.There is a risk of injury.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine mayotherwise be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †.
# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Rfaulty alternatorRtorn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.X Open the bonnet.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is OK:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
244 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
(Y page 286).X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 287).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
æReserve fuel level
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ç There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.
¸Replace air cleaner
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and mustbe replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
i This message does not appear for the 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, manual transmission model A.
!Clean the fuel fil‐ter
Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ÀAttention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐ted
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that youget enough rest.
ÀAttention Assist inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 245
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Speed Limit AssistCurrently unavail‐able See Owner's Manual
Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-play message disappears.Speed Limit Assist is operational again.
Speed Limit Assist:Unavailable in this country
Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries.X Drive on.
Speed Limit Assist is available again as soon as you drive into acountry in which its use is approved.
Speed Limit Assist inoperative
Speed Limit Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ëOff
The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 179).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 179).
Radar sensor deac‐tivated See Own‐er's Manual
The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated
(Y page 350).X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 223).
Radar sensor deac‐tivated autom. See Owner's Manual
Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radiotelescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting anyradar signals. The radar sensor system is deactivated automati-cally.If Blind Spot Assist was activated, it is no longer available. Theyellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Drive on.
Blind Spot Assist is available again as soon as the vehicle is farenough away from the radio telescope facility (Y page 350).
246 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Vehicles with Becker® MAP PILOT: if the Becker® MAP PILOT isnot connected, the radar sensor system is deactivated automati-cally.Blind Spot Assist is not available.X Connect the Becker® MAP PILOT; see the separate operating
instructions.
Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Clean the windscreen.
Lane Keeping Assist inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐able See Owner's Manual
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.You have established the electrical connection between the trailerand your vehicle.X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
sage.Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.
Display messages 247
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Clean the sensors (Y page 294).X Restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist inoperative
Blind Spot Assist is faulty.The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist cancel‐led
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel whilesteering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the
multifunction steering wheel.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 186).
248 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Park Assist inoper‐ative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmanoeuvres.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-imately ten minutes (Y page 186).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Switch off and restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 173). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS available again
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 173).
DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐rently unavailable See Owner's Manual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirtyRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display messagegoes out.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 294).X Restart the engine.
Display messages 249
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. Adaptive Brake Assist may also havefailed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS inactive
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS--- km/h
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 175).
DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐erative
DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tonealso sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐erative
SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Limit--- km/h
While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.
Cruise control--- km/h
A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 169).
120 km/hMaximum speed exceeded
Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-ded.In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h.X Drive more slowly.
250 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Tyres
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressureCheck tyres
The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGWith tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tyre traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you doso.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tyre (Y page 300).X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre
pressure.X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 323).
Check tyre pres‐suresthen restart Run Flat Indicator
The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 323).
Run Flat Indicator inoperative
The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 251
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To start engine,shift to either P or N
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary batterymalfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before
you switch off the engine.X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Depress brake to start engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.
To shift out of P or Ndepress brake and start engine
You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or Dwithout starting the engine.X Start the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P tothe desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only thencan the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress thebrake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved butthe parking lock remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 † you can onlyshift out of position P into another transmission position whenthe engine is running.
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position
You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.
Risk of vehicle rollingTransmission not in P
The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, Nor D.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).
252 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Without changing gear,consult workshop
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Only select Park (P) whenvehicle is station‐ary
The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Shift the transmission to position P.
Reversing not poss. Consult work‐shop
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot drive inreverse.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐function
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission mal‐function Stop
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running
The automatic transmission has overheated.X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the automatic transmissionis available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled off and the
display message goes out.
Display messages 253
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Trans. oil overhea‐ted Drive on with care
AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual driveprogram are no longer available. The engine power output isreduced.X Allow the vehicle to cool down.
4matic currently unavailable
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) has overheated. The vehicleis only driven by the front wheels.X Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available againand the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.
4matic inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the frontwheels.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
A The tailgate is open.
G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.
? The bonnet is open.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGThe open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is inmotion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Close the bonnet.
Active bonnet mal‐function See Own‐er's Manual
The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to amalfunction or because it has already been triggered.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors.
254 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
jCheck trailer hitch lock
The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.A warning tone also sounds.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position
(Y page 203).Otherwise, the trailer may detach itself.
ÐPower steering mal‐function See Own‐er's Manual
The power steering assistance is faulty.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
&inoperative Bat‐tery low
You have attempted to switch on the auxiliary heating or to acti-vate a departure time using the on-board computer after operatingthe auxiliary heating twice.X Let the engine run for 10 seconds.
The auxiliary heating is operational again.
The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switcheditself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 134).X Drive for a longer distance.
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operationalagain as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suf-ficient.
&inoperative Refuel vehicle
There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannotbe switched on (Y page 134).X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
Display messages 255
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&inoperative See Owner's Man.
The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat-ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt(Y page 134).
X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Telephone No service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥Top up washer fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.
i If, during the winter months, you do not add antifreeze to thewasher fluid, it may freeze in the washer fluid container. In thiscase, the Top up washer fluid display message may appearin the multifunction display.
X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 289).
Wiper malfunction‐ing
The windscreen wipers are defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ing
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+Key does not belong to vehicle
You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.X Use the correct key.
+Replace key
The key needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
256 Display messagesOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Seat belts
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
Only for certain coun-tries: the red seat beltwarning lamp lights upfor six seconds afterthe engine starts.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).
ü
Only for certain coun-tries: the red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts.In addition, a warningtone sounds for up tosix seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).
The warning tone ceases.
ü
The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.
ü
The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Atthe same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have brieflydriven faster than 25 km/h.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven fasterthan 25 km/h.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J
The red brake systemwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNINGThe braking efficiency may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the
fault.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
!
The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault.BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP® (Elec-tronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill startassist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation arealso therefore deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will be unavailable.
258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution),PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brakelights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also deacti-vated.Possible causes:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficientATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock, for example, if you brake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 259
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, theadaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example,are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock, for example, if you brake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
J֌!
The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®
and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hillstart assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisa-tion, for example, are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock, for example, if you brake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
260 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 65).
å
The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.
ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will notstabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
G WARNING
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 65).X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M
AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT han-dling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations
(Y page 66).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 261
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֌
The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.
ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, PRE-SAFE®, theHOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights andESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
֌
The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable.The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTmay also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The red indicator lampfor the electric parkingbrake flashes or is litand/or the yellowwarning lamp for theelectric parking brakeis lit.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
6
The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem).
G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,see (Y page 41).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 263
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The yellow engine diag-nostics warning lamplights up while theengine is running.
There may be a fault, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry(Y page 161).X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emer-gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not bechecked.
æ
The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel leveldrops into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
?
The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gauge is at thestart of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isfaulty.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.
The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be mal-functioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 288).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged.X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
?
The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to theengine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be toolow.
G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engineis overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns whichcan occur just by opening the bonnet.This poses a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 265
On-b
oard
com
pute
r and
dis
play
s
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 288).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Driving systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.X Increase the distance.
·
The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-boa
rd c
ompu
ter a
nd d
ispl
ays
Useful information ............................ 268Loading guidelines ............................ 268Stowage areas .................................. 269Features ............................................. 275
267
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Loading guidelines
G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, especiallywhen braking or abruptly changing directions.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle(including occupants).Rthe luggage compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
sible and as low down in the luggage com-partment as possible.Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.Ralways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage
nets to transport loads and luggage.Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening com-
ponents that are suitable for the weight andsize of the load.Rthe maximum load capacity of the stowage
well under the luggage compartment flooris 25 kg.Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharpedges for protection.
i Lashing material is available at any quali-fied specialist workshop.
! Do not position the load on one part of thefolding luggage compartment floor only.The maximum load capacity of the foldingluggage compartment floor is 100 kg.Spread the weight evenly to avoid damag-ing the luggage compartment floor. Place asolid board under the load if necessary.Please note that the load on the luggagecompartment floor will be increased whenthe load is lashed down.
268 Loading guidelinesSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, lug-gage nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the luggage compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268).
Front stowage compartments
Glove compartment
X To open: pull handle : and open glovecompartment flap ;.
X To close: fold glove compartment flap ;upwards until it engages.
i There is a pen holder at the top of theglove compartment flap.
Spectacles compartment
X To open: press marking :.
Make sure that the spectacles compartmentis always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the centre con-sole
X To open: press the marking on cover :.i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there is an open instead of a closed stow-age compartment or an ashtray in thecentre console.
Stowage areas 269
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
Stowage compartment in front of the arm-rest (vehicles with automatic transmis-sion)
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
i You can remove the non-slip mat and theinsert for cleaning. When removing theinsert you will have to overcome someslight resistance.
Stowage compartment/telephone com-partment under the armrest
X To open: on vehicles with moveable armr-ests, make sure that the armrest is in therearmost position.
X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB port and an AUX-IN jack or a MediaInterface are installed in the stowage com-partment. A Media Interface is a universalinterface for portable audio equipment, e.g.for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the sepa-rate Audio or COMAND Online operatinginstructions).
Stowage compartment under the driver'sand front-passenger seatG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum permitted load ofthe stowage compartment, the cover isunable to restrain the objects. Objects maybe thrown out of the stowage compartmentand hit vehicle occupants as a result. There isa risk of injury, particularly in the event ofsudden braking or a sudden change in direc-tion.Always observe the maximum load of thestowage compartment. Stow and secureheavy objects in the luggage compartment.
The maximum permissible load of the stow-age compartment is 1.2 kg.
X To open: pull handle : up and foldcover ; forwards.
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisherinstead of a stowage compartment, the fireextinguisher is installed under the driver'sseat.
270 Stowage areasSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
Rear stowage compartments
Stowage compartment in the rear centreconsole
X To open: pull down the top of stowagecompartment : by the edge of the handle.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,there may be an open stowage space abovethe stowage compartment.
Luggage nets! The maximum load that may be placed on
the luggage net under the rear shelf is2.5 kg.
Luggage nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and front-
passenger seatRbeneath the parcel shelfRon the left and right-hand side in the lug-
gage compartmentObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 268)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 269).
Through-loading facility in the rearcompartment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268).
X To open: fold down seat armrest :.X Pull the cover, which can now be seen, for-
wards by the grip until it lies on arm-rest :.
X Pull the centre head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 94).
X Slide locking mechanism = in the direc-tion of the arrow.
X Swing flap ; fully to the side.Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
X To close: swing flap ; in the luggage com-partment back until it engages.
X Fold the cover forwards until it engages intoarmrest :.
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
Stowage areas 271
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
Enlarging the luggage compartment
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt cannot protect as intended andcould result in additional injury.RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.
This poses an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged before every trip.
! Before folding the backrest in the rearcompartment forwards, make sure that therear compartment armrest and thecupholder are folded in. They may other-wise be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268).
Folding the rear seat backrest forwardsand back
Folding the rear seat backrest forwardThe left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-ests can be folded forwards separately toincrease the luggage compartment capacity.
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints(Y page 96).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-dle ; of the seat backrest forwards.The corresponding seat backrest : isreleased.
X Fold backrest : forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X Insert the seat belt into seat-beltextender :.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.
272 Stowage areasSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.Red lock status indicator ; is no longervisible.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 96).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.
Parcel shelf
! The maximum load which may be placedon the rear shelf is 2.5 kg.
X To remove: detach straps : from the tail-gate.
X Swing the rear shelf down.X Pull the rear shelf out to the rear ;.X To fit: place the rear shelf on the guide rails
on the left and right.X Push the rear shelf evenly forwards using
both hands until it engages.X Swing the rear shelf up.X Attach straps : to the tailgate.
Securing a load
Lashing eyeletsObserve the following notes on securingloads:Robserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 268).Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
Rdistribute the load on the lashing eyeletsevenly.Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp
edges or corners.Rpad sharp edges for protection.There are four lashing eyelets in the luggagecompartment.
: Lashing eyelets
Bag hook
G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.
There is one bag hook on either side of theluggage compartment.
Stowage areas 273
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
: Bag hook
Stowage well underneath the luggagecompartment floor
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you drive when the luggage compartmentfloor is open, objects could be flung around,thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a riskof injury, especially when braking or abruptlychanging directions.Always close the luggage compartment floorbefore a journey.
! The maximum load capacity of the stow-age well under the luggage compartmentfloor is 25 kg.
Opening/closing the luggage compart-ment floorA bracket for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc.is located underneath the luggage compart-ment floor.
X To open: open the tailgate.X Press down handle : on ribbing ;.
Handle : folds upwards.X Swing the luggage compartment floor
upwards using handle : until it restsagainst the luggage compartment cover.
X If the rear shelf is fitted: hook the loop onthe luggage compartment floor into thehook on the underside of the rear shelf.
X If the rear shelf is not fitted: fold out hook= on the underside of the luggage com-partment floor.
X Attach hook = to the luggage compart-ment's upper seal ?.
X To close (if the rear shelf is fitted):unhook the loop from the hook on theunderside of the rear shelf.
X If the rear shelf is not fitted: detach hook= from upper seal ?.
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on theunderside of the luggage compartmentfloor.
274 Stowage areasSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
X Fold the luggage compartment floor down.X Press the luggage compartment floor down
until it engages.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G WARNINGAn incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack orload could become detached from the vehi-cle. These objects might then be thrownaround, and could injure you or others orcause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/skirack manufacturer's installation instructionsand special instructions for use.The roof load raises the vehicle's centre ofgravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.You must always observe the maximum roofload of 75 kg. Always adapt your driving styleto the prevailing road, traffic and weatherconditions and drive with particular care if theroof is laden.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panoramasliding sunroof fully and open the tailgatefully when the roof carrier is fitted.
i Vehicles with panorama sliding sun-roof: if a roof carrier is fitted, the panoramasliding sunroof cannot be opened. In orderto allow ventilation of the vehicle interior,you can raise the panorama sliding sunroof.If a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz makes contact with the panoramasliding sunroof, the sunroof will lowerslightly but remain raised in the rear.
Attaching the roof carrier
X Open covers : carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.
X Fold covers : upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
age points under covers :.X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holders
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot secure a drinks con-tainer in place during a journey. If you use acup holder during a journey, the drinks con-tainer could be flung around and liquid couldbe spilt. Vehicle occupants could come intocontact with the liquid and, in particular, bescalded by hot liquid. You could be distractedfrom the traffic situation and lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only place containers of a suitablesize in the cup holder. Seal the container, inparticular when it contains hot liquid.
G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.
Features 275
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, lug-gage nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the luggage compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.
The stowage compartments in the doors pro-vide space for bottles:Rfront: capacity up to 1.0 lRrear: capacity up to 0.5 l
Cup holder in the front centre console
All vehicles (except vehicles with Audio 5)
Two coin holders = and a card holder ; canbe found in the cup holder.The cup holder and the rubber mat under-neath can be removed for cleaning. Cleanthem with clean, lukewarm water only.X To remove: Lift the cup holder up and out
with a brief tug :.
X To fit:: insert the cup holder into lateralcurved sections ; in the stowage com-partment. Simultaneously insert the cupholder in such a way that the wedge of theupper section of the cup holder faces for-wards.
X : Press the cup holder downwards until itengages on the right and left-hand sides.
Vehicles with Audio 5
X Fold lift-up lid : in stowage compartment= up until it engages in the two lugs ;.You can use front part ? as a cup holder.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.
276 FeaturesSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; backuntil it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light : only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket ; and mirror coverA has been folded up.
Glare from the side
X Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of bracket ;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun
visor horizontally as desired.
Ashtray
Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.
Example: vehicles with a stowage compartmentcoverX To open: push the lower section of
cover :.The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert =up ; and out.
X To refit the insert: press insert = into theholder until it engages.
i If you remove the ashtray insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for stow-age.
Features 277
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
Rear-compartment ashtray
X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in
the direction of arrow ? until it audiblyreleases.
X Lift insert ; up and out.X To fit the insert: fit insert ; from above
into the holder and press down into theholder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for exampleThere is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.
Example: vehicles with a stowage compartmentcoverX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).X To open: push the lower section of
cover :.The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
Points to observe before useX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 143).The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as lamps or chargersfor mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.
i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If theon-board voltage is too low, the power tothe sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.
278 FeaturesSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
Socket in the front centre console
Vehicles with a stowage compartment coverX To open: push the lower section of
cover :.The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Vehicles without a stowage compartment coverX Lift up the cover of socket :.
Socket in the rear-compartment centreconsole
X Pull cover : out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Socket in the luggage compartment
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
Mobile phone
Important safety notes
G WARNINGOperating mobile communications equip-ment while driving distracts you from payingattention to traffic conditions. This could alsocause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a risk of an accident.Use this device only when the vehicle is sta-tionary.
i You must observe the legal requirementsfor the country in which you are currentlydriving when operating mobile communi-cations equipment in the vehicle.If it is permitted by law to operate commu-nications equipment while the vehicle is inmotion, you may only do so if the traffic sit-uation permits. You may otherwise be dis-tracted from the traffic conditions, causean accident and injure yourself and others.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and to thehealth of others. The use of an exterior aerialtakes into consideration the scientific discus-
Features 279
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
sion surrounding the possible health riskposed by electromagnetic fields.Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of anapproved exterior aerial. This ensures:Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in
the vehicleRmutual influences between the vehicle
electronics and mobile phones are mini-mised
An exterior aerial has the following advan-tages:Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen-
erated by a wireless device to the exterior.Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is
lower than in a vehicle that does not havean exterior aerial.
Information on retrofitting two-way radiosand mobile phones (RF transmitters)(Y page 336).
General notesThere are various mobile phone brackets thatmay be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases,these are country-specific.You can connect a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone with Audio 20 or COMANDOnline via the Bluetooth® interface. This alsoapplies if your vehicle is equipped with con-venience telephony.More information on suitable mobile phones,mobile phone brackets and on connectingBluetooth®-capable mobile phones withAudio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained:Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect
i The functions and services available whenyou use the phone depend on your mobilephone model and service provider.
Using a mobile phoneIf the mobile phone is inserted in the mobilephone bracket, you can speak to the personyou are calling using the hands-free system.X Open the telephone compartment
(Y page 270).X Place the mobile phone bracket into the
pre-installed fitting (see the separateinstallation instructions for the mobilephone fitting).
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobilephone bracket (see the separate installa-tion instructions for the mobile phone fit-ting).
i On some mobile phone brackets, first youhave to connect the phone to the mobilephone bracket via Bluetooth® (see the sep-arate operating instructions for the mobilephone bracket).If this is the case, the mobile phone doesnot have to be inserted into the bracket foryou to be able to use the telephone func-tions. However, the charging function andaerial function are not available.
Operating the mobile phoneYou can operate the telephone using the6 and ~ buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel. You can operate other mobilephone functions via the on-board computer(Y page 215).When you remove the key from the ignitionlock, the mobile phone stays switched on.However, you can no longer use the hands-free system.If you have an active call and would like totake the key out of the ignition lock, firstremove the mobile phone from the bracket.
i If you use a mobile phone bracket whichis connected to your mobile via Blue-tooth® and you wish to continue a call onyour mobile phone:You should switch the call to "Privatemode" before you remove the key from the
280 FeaturesSt
owin
g an
d fe
atur
es
ignition lock. Otherwise, it will take up to20 seconds for the mobile phone to dis-connect from the system. Only then canyou continue the call on your mobile phone.Notes on the necessary steps for setting"Private mode" can be found in the sepa-rate operating instructions of the mobilephone.
i Not all mobile phones support "Privatemode".
Mobile phone bracket in the stowagespaceYou can fold the pre-installed bracket up toimprove access to the stowage spacebeneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, a USB connection and an AUX-IN con-nection/Media Interface are fitted in thestowage compartment (Y page 270).
X To fold the bracket up: press button :.X To fold the bracket down: press the
bracket down and allow it to engage.
Floormat on the driver's side
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Fit the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.
X Slide the seat backwards.X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
ers ;.X To remove: pull the floormat away from
retainers ;.X Remove the floormats.
Retrofitted anti-glare filmRetrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of thewindows can interfere with radio/mobiletelephone reception. This is particularly thecase for conductive or metallic-coated films.You can obtain information about anti-glarefilm from a qualified specialist workshop.
Features 281
Stow
ing
and
feat
ures
Z
282
Useful information ............................ 284Engine compartment ........................ 284Service ............................................... 289Care .................................................... 290
283
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Engine compartment
Bonnet
Important safety notes
G WARNINGAn unlocked bonnet may open while drivingand block your view. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Never unlock the bonnet while driving.
G WARNINGWhen being opened and closed, the bonnetmay suddenly fall into the closed position.There is a risk of injury to persons in the rangeof movement of the bonnet.Open and close the bonnet only when nobodyis in the range of movement.
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the following compo-nents.
G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leakingservice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.
G WARNINGThere are parts in the engine compartmentthat move. Certain components may continueto run even if the ignition is switched off ormay suddenly start again, e.g. the radiatorfan. There is a danger of injury.If you need to access the engine compart-ment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever enter the danger area of moving com-
ponents, e.g. the rotation area of the fanRkeep items of clothing away from moving
parts
G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem operate with a high voltage. If you touchthe live components, you could receive anelectric shock. There is a danger of injury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or the fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Operating principle! Once triggered, an active bonnet must be
reset at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Theactive bonnet function will then be availa-ble again. The additional pedestrian pro-tection provided by the active bonnet willthen be restored.
The active bonnet is only available in certaincountries.The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injuryto pedestrians in certain accident situations.
284 Engine compartmentM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
Raising the active bonnet increases the clear-ance to hard components, such as the engine.If the active bonnet has been triggered, it israised at the rear in the area around the hingeby approximately 60 mm.For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig-gered active bonnet yourself. If the activebonnet has been triggered, pedestrian pro-tection may be limited.
ResettingG WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the following compo-nents.
X With your hand flat, push down active bon-net : in the area around the hinges onboth sides (arrows) until you feel it engage.
If you can raise the active bonnet slightly inthe area around the hinges, it is not engagedcorrectly. Repeat the step.If the bonnet can then still be raised, drivedirectly to a qualified specialist workshop. Donot drive faster than 100 km/h.
Opening the bonnet
G WARNINGWhen the bonnet is open, and the windscreenwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before opening the bonnet.
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers arenot folded away from the windscreen. Oth-erwise, you could damage the windscreenwipers or the bonnet.
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers areswitched off.
X Pull release lever : on the bonnet.The bonnet is released.
X Reach into the gap between the bonnet andthe radiator trim and press bonnet catchlever ; to the left.
X Raise the bonnet.
Engine compartment 285
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Z
X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into
yellow retaining clip =.
Closing the bonnetX Raise the bonnet slightly and, at the same
time, remove support strut ? from yellowretaining clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press itinto bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from aheight of approximately 20 cm.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-erly.If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Do not press the bonnetclosed. Open the bonnet again and close itwith a little more force.
Engine oil
General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1,000 km. Theoil consumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe installed at a different location.
When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly: wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.
286 Engine compartmentM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine
Vehicles with a diesel engine (apart from the A 180CDI BlueEFFICIENCY model with manual transmis-sion)
A 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY, manual transmissionX All models apart from the A 180 CDI
BlueEFFICIENCY model with manual transmission: pull out oil dipstick :.
X A 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY model with manual transmission: undo the oil fillercap and pull it out together with integratedoil dipstick :.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark = andMAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, top up with 1.0 litre of engineoil.
Adding engine oil
G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil does not spill outover the filler neck. Allow the engine to cooldown and thoroughly clean the componentsthat have come into contact with engine oilbefore you start the engine.
H Environmental noteWhen topping up the oil, take care not to spillany. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it isharmful to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for theservice systemRchanging the engine oil and oil filter after
missing the change interval required bythe service systemRusing engine oil additives
! Do not add too much oil. Topping up withtoo much engine oil can result in damage
Engine compartment 287
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Z
to the engine or to the catalytic converter.Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil filler capX Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.X Top up the engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 litre ofengine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Make sure that the cap locks securely intoplace.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 287).
For further information on engine oil, see(Y page 343).
Checking and adding other serviceproducts
Checking the coolant level
G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is under pressure,particularly if the engine is warm. You couldbe scalded by hot coolant spraying out whenopening the cap. There is a danger of injury.Allow the engine to cool before opening thecap. Wear gloves and protective eyewearwhen opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turnto allow pressure to escape.
! The coolant level must only be checkedand corrected when the engine has cooleddown (coolant temperature under 40 †).
Checking the coolant level when the cool-ant temperature is over 40 † can lead todamage to the engine or engine coolingsystem.
ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level if the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 143).
X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below40 †.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 143) inthe ignition lock.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.
X If necessary, top up with coolant that hasbeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.
For further information on coolant, see(Y page 344).
288 Engine compartmentM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
Topping up the windscreen washer sys-tem/headlamp cleaning system
G WARNINGWindscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windscreen washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
ExampleX To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindscreen washer system and the headlampcleaning system.The recommended minimum amount whentopping up is 1 litre. If the water level dropsbelow this, a message appears in the multi-function display prompting you to refill thewasher fluid (Y page 256).Further information on windscreen washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 345).
Service
ASSYST PLUS
Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see separate Service Booklet).You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 286).
The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for a few seconds, e.g.:RNext service A in .. daysRService A dueRService A overdue by .. daysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter indicates which service is due. Astands for a minor service and B for a majorservice. A number or another letter may bedisplayed after the letter. This figure indicatesany necessary additional maintenance workto be performed.If you notify a qualified specialist workshop ofthis display, you will receive a statement onthe associated costs.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.
orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.
Hiding a service messageX Press % or a.
Service 289
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Z
Displaying service messagesX Switch the ignition on.X Using = or ;, select the Service
menu.X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-val display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Service Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display afterthe service work has been carried out. Youcan also obtain further information on main-tenance work, for example.
Special service requirementsThe prescribed service interval is based onnormal operation of the vehicle. Service workwill need to be performed more often if thevehicle is operated under arduous conditionsor increased loads, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distancesRfor frequent operation in mountainous ter-
rain or on poor road surfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-
odsIn these or similar operating conditions, havethe air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for exam-ple, changed more frequently. The tyres must
be checked more frequently if the vehicle isoperated under increased loads. Furtherinformation can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.
Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. TheService Hotline's current telephone numbersfor use when you are abroad are to be foundin the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" sectionof the Service Booklet.
Care
General notes
H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsible man-ner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked up.
290 CareM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Care of the exterior
Automatic car wash
G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after the vehiclehas been washed. There is a risk of an acci-dent.After washing the vehicle, brake carefullywhile paying attention to the traffic conditionsin order to restore full braking efficiency.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-cle could be damaged if the transmission isin another position.
! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
closed completely.Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off (OFF button is depressed/airflow control is turned to position 0).Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi-
tion 0.The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi-cle in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windscreen and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-screen.
Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at wash bays that are speciallydesigned for this purpose. Observe the legalrequirements for each individual country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.
High-pressure cleaning equipment
G WARNINGThe water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-ers) can cause damage not visible from theoutside to tyres or chassis components. Com-ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-aged tyres or chassis components replacedimmediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least30 cm between the vehicle and the high-
Care 291
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Z
pressure cleaner nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzlearound when cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtyresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrim elementsRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the wheels! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked up.
Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.
X Remove impurities immediately, wherepossible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.The following cannot always be completelyrepaired:RscratchesRcorrosive depositsRareas affected by corrosionRdamage caused by inadequate careIn such cases, visit a qualified specialist work-shop.
Care and treatment of matt paintwork! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing makes the paintworkshiny.
! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-
rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matt finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.
292 CareM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matt finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light-alloy wheelswith a clear matt finish.
i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the windows
G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There is adanger of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades.
! Only fold the windscreen wipers awayfrom the windscreen when vertical. Other-wise, you will damage the bonnet.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindscreen and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the wiper blades
G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There is adanger of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades.
! Only fold the windscreen wipers awayfrom the windscreen when vertical. Other-wise, you will damage the bonnet.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen.
X Clean the wiper blades carefully using adamp cloth.
X Fold the windscreen wipers back againbefore switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windscreen could be damaged ifthe wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the exterior lighting.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.
Care 293
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Z
Cleaning the mirror turn signal! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or clean-ing cloths.
Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 30 cm between thevehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-zle. Information about the correct distanceis available from the equipment manufac-turer.
X Clean sensors : of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the reversing camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the reversing camera with a high-pressure cleaner.
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipesImpurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes:do not use chrome polish to polish blackchromed screens. They will otherwise losetheir silky black shine. Rub the screen usinga lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.Commercially available engine oils, WD 40or Ballistol are suitable oils.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
H Environmental noteDispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-ronmentally-responsible manner.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
! Observe the note on care provided by thetrailer manufacturer.
294 CareM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
a brush.X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-
pling :.X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
i Maintenance of the ball coupling andtrailer tow hitch can also be performed ata qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Interior care
Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or petrolRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-
ing agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fibre cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. This could result in plasticparts breaking away when the airbags aredeployed. There is a danger of injury.Do not use care products and cleaning agentscontaining solvents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou could otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come in contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change colour tempora-rily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wooden trim and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.
Care 295
Mai
nten
ance
and
car
e
Z
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim elementswith a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfi-bre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen-
uine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.
i Note that regular care is essential tomake sure that the appearance and com-fort of the covers are retained over time.
Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colourThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.
! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.
Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibre
cloth moistened with a solution contain-ing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).Rub carefully, and always wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type ofdirt and how long it has been there.RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNINGSeat belts may be severely weakened ifbleached or coloured. This may lead to theseat belts, for example, tearing or failing in anaccident. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Never bleach or colour seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsat temperatures above 80 † or in directsunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.
Cleaning the roof lining and carpetsX Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft
brush or a cleaning agent recommendedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.
296 CareM
aint
enan
ce a
nd c
are
Useful information ............................ 298Where will I find...? ........................... 298Flat tyre ............................................. 300Battery (vehicle) ................................ 304Jump-starting .................................... 308Towing and tow-starting .................. 310Electrical fuses ................................. 314
297
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Where will I find...?
Warning triangle
Removing/replacing the warning trian-gle
X To remove: open the tailgate.X Swing the luggage compartment floor
upwards (Y page 274).X To loosen warning triangle :, push back
the retainers on the bracket.X Remove warning triangle : from the
bracket.X To replace: place warning triangle : back
into the bracket and push down to secure.
Setting up the warning triangle
X Fold feet = down and out to the side.X Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top usingpress stud :.
First-aid kit
X Open the tailgate.X To open the stowage compartment: turn
rotary knob : anti-clockwise and folddown cover ;.
298 Where will I find...?Br
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
X Remove first-aid kit =.
i Check the expiry date on first-aid kit =at least once a year. Replace the contentsif necessary, and replace any missingitems.
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is located underneaththe front of the driver's seat.X Pull tab : upwards.X Remove the fire extinguisher.
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled aftereach use and checked every one or twoyears. It may otherwise fail in an emer-gency.Observe the legal requirements for eachindividual country.
Vehicle tool kit
General notesVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit islocated in the stowage well under the bootfloor.Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit: the tyre-change tool kit is in the stowage well underthe luggage compartment floor.For vehicles with an emergency spare wheel,see "Removing the emergency spare wheel"(Y page 332).
i Apart from some country-specific var-iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changing tools. Some tools for changing awheel are specific to the vehicle. For moreinformation on which tools are required andapproved to perform a wheel change onyour vehicle, consult a qualified specialistworkshop.Necessary tyre-changing tools can include,for example:RJackRWheel chockRWheel wrench
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
: Tyre inflation compressor; Towing eye= Tyre sealant filler bottleX Open the tailgate.X Swing the luggage compartment floor
upwards (Y page 274).
i Towing eye ; is located under tyre infla-tion compressor :.
Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kitX Open the tailgate.X Swing the luggage compartment floor
upwards (Y page 274).X Remove the tyre-change tool kit.The tyre-change tool kit contains:RJackRWheel wrench
Where will I find...? 299
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
ROne pair of glovesRFoldable wheel chock
Flat tyre
Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
acteristics) (Y page 300)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tyres.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 299)Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
countries)Information on changing/fitting a wheel(Y page 325).X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and levelground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 162).X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.X Place the warning triangle a suitable dis-
tance away (Y page 298). Observe legalrequirements.
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kitif you fit tyres that do not feature run-flatcharacteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFITkit can be obtained from a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics)
General notesWith MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tyres. The affectedtyre must not show any clearly visible dam-age.You can recognise MOExtended tyres by theMOExtended marking which appears on thetyre wall. You will find this marking next to thetyre size designation, the load-bearing capa-city and the speed index.MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-junction with an active tyre pressure losswarning system.If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the display
messages (Y page 251).RCheck the tyre for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance is approx-imately 80 km when the vehicle is partiallyladen and approximately 30 km when thevehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RspeedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/manoeuvres, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.
300 Flat tyreBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flat mode is counted fromthe moment the tyre pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h.
i When replacing one or all tyres, makesure that you use only:Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle andRtyre(s) marked "MOExtended"If a tyre has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with an MOExtended tyre, astandard tyre may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertyre).
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kitif you fit tyres that do not feature run-flatcharacteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFITkit can be obtained from a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeu-vres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot-holes, off-road). This applies in particular to aladen vehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre.
After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thefaulty tyre must be replaced.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tyre sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
larger than those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
or on a flat tyre.There is a risk of accident.Do not drive any further. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
G WARNINGThe tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tyre sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
immediately with water.RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tyre sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
Flat tyre 301
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
Using the TIREFIT kitTIREFIT is a tyre sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of upto 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread.You can use TIREFIT at outside temperaturesdown to Ò20 †.
TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws ornails.
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the luggage compartment floor(Y page 299).
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
X Remove filler hose B and plug = from thebottom section of the tyre inflation com-pressor housing.
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector intothe mounting on yellow cap A of tyre seal-ant bottle : until the plug engages.
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellowcap A of tyre sealant bottle : into themounting of tyre inflation compressor ;until the cap and both hooks engage.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faultytyre.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve.X Insert plug = into the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter (Y page 278) or into a 12 Vpower socket in your vehicle (Y page 278).
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 143).
X Press on/off switch ? on the tyre inflationcompressor to ON.The tyre inflation compressor is switchedon. The tyre is inflated.
i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-pressor during this phase.
X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tyre shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-pressor for longer than ten minutes at a
302 Flat tyreBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasbeen achieved after ten minutes, see(Y page 303).If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been achieved after ten minutes, see(Y page 303).
i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry.It can then be removed like a layer of film.If you get tyre sealant on your clothing,have it cleaned as soon as possible withperchloroethylene.
Tyre pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tyre.X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 10 m.X Pump up the tyre again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tyrepressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
G WARNINGIf the required tyre pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tyre is too badlydamaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair thetyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyrepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Tyre pressure reached
G WARNINGA tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tyre thathas been repaired using tyre sealant.
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
H Environmental noteHave the used tyre sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.
If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tyre.X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
tion compressor and the warning triangle.X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tyre sealed withtyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of theTIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru-ment cluster where it will be easily seen bythe driver.X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tyre pressure withthe tyre inflation compressor.The tyre pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G WARNINGIf the required tyre pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tyre is toobadly damaged. The tyre sealant cannotrepair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres
Flat tyre 303
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif-icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driv-ing characteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker withthe Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephonenumber, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.
X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (see the fuel fillerflap for values).
X To increase the tyre pressure: switch onthe tyre inflation compressor.
X To reduce the tyre pressure: depresspressure release button : next to pres-sure gauge ;.
X To remove the tyre sealant bottle from thetyre inflation compressor, press togetherthe locking tabs on the yellow cap.
X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyreinflation compressor.
The filler hose stays on the tyre sealantbottle.
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-tion compressor and the warning triangle.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tyre changed there.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the fillerhose replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notesWork on the battery, e.g. removing or instal-ling, requires specialist knowledge and theuse of special tools. Therefore, always havework on the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit anddamage your vehicle's electronic system. Thiscan disrupt driving safety systems such asABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Elec-tronic Stability Program).RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock
during braking. This limits the steerabilityof the vehicle when braking and the brakingdistance may increase. There is a risk ofaccident.RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be
stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel startsto spin. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore have all work involvingthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.
G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
304 Battery (vehicle)Br
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture is formedwhen charging the battery or jump-startingthe vehicle.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. Electro-static charge is caused, for example, by:Rwearing synthetic clothingRthe friction of clothing on the seatRpulling or sliding the battery over carpets
or other synthetic materialsRrubbing the battery with a cloth
G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-connecting the jump leads.RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.
H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.
! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the ServiceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.
! Always have work on the battery carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.Should it, in exceptional circumstances, beabsolutely necessary to disconnect the bat-tery yourself, please observe the following:Rswitch off the engine and remove the
key. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,you may damage electronic componentssuch as the alternator, for example.Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminal
clamp, followed by the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.The vehicle electronics may otherwise bedamaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.
Battery (vehicle) 305
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be fitted securely dur-ing operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.
WARNING
Fire, naked flames and smokingare prohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,in particular gloves, an apron anda face mask.Immediately rinse acid splashesoff with clean water. Consult a doc-tor if necessary.Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the eventof an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In such cases, have the battery dis-connected at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can also charge the battery with acharger recommended by Mercedes-Benz.For more information, please contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.Have the battery charge checked more fre-quently if you use the vehicle mainly for shorttrips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked up for a long period of time.
i When you park the vehicle, remove thekey if you do not require any electrical con-sumers. The vehicle will then use very littleenergy, thus conserving battery power.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if the battery was discharged, you willhave to:Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND
Online, see the separate operatinginstructions).Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 99).
Charging the battery
G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.
306 Battery (vehicle)Br
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-start connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 308).X Open the bonnet (Y page 285).X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and earth point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery inthe jump-starting procedure(Y page 308).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light upat low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this caseyou may neither jump-start the vehicle norcharge the battery. The service life of a bat-tery that has been thawed could be reduced.The starting characteristics may be impaired,especially at low temperatures. Have thethawed battery checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Only charge the installed battery with a bat-tery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A batterycharger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved byMercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.It permits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for information and availabil-ity. Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.
Battery (vehicle) 307
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.
G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jump leads.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise,the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed could be reduced. The starting
308 Jump-startingBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpleads. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jump leads are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jump leads are connected to the battery.Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Manual transmission: shift into neutral.X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the bonnet (Y page 285).
Jump-starting 309
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery.X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using
the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first.X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehiclefirst.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained atany qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G WARNINGSafety-relevant functions are restricted or notavailable if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioningRthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical
system is malfunctioning.If your vehicle is towed, significantly greaterforce may be required to steer the vehicle orto brake. There is a risk of an accident.In such circumstances, use a towing bar.Make sure that the steering is moving freelybefore towing.
G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could over-
turn.There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 338).
G WARNINGThe vehicle is braked when the HOLD functionor DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if thevehicle is to be towed.
310 Towing and tow-startingBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar tothe towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwisebe damaged.
! Observe the following points when towingwith a tow rope:Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on
both vehicles.Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer
than legally permitted. Mark the tow ropein the middle, e.g. with a white cloth(30 x 30 cm). This makes other roadusers aware that a vehicle is beingtowed.Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing
eye.Robserve the brake lamps of the towing
vehicle while driving. Always maintain adistance so that the tow rope does notsag.Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow
your vehicle. You could otherwise dam-age the vehicle.
! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! Pull away smoothly when towing away ortow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive poweris too high, the vehicles could be damaged.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximumof 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h mustnot be exceeded.For towing distances over 50 km, the frontaxle or the entire vehicle must be raisedand transported.
! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. The transmissionmay otherwise be damaged.
Observe the legal requirements for the rele-vant countries when towing and tow-starting.It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:when towing a vehicle, the transmission mustbe in position N.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2Rvehicles with automatic transmission:
cannot shift the transmission to position Ni Deactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 223). You could otherwise belocked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.Deactivate tow-away protection(Y page 70) before the vehicle is towed.
Fitting/removing the towing eye
Fitting the towing eye
X Remove the towing eye from the stowagespace.The towing eye is located with the vehicletool kit under the luggage compartmentfloor (Y page 299).
Towing and tow-starting 311
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the towing eyeis located under the tyre inflation compres-sor.
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in thedirection of the arrow.
X Remove cover : from the opening.X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the
stop and tighten it.Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not havea bracket for the screw-in towing eye at theback. If you intend to use the vehicle for tow-ing, fold out the ball coupling (Y page 203)and secure the towbar to it.
Removing the towing eyeX Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.X Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
under the luggage compartment floor(Y page 299).
X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: replace the tyreinflation compressor.
Towing the vehicle with the front axleraised
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the front axle raised.! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,the transmission may be damaged.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.
! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the front axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal fully and shift toneutral.
orX Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.
X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Deactivate automatic locking
(Y page 223).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 108).X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
0 and leave the key in the ignition lock.When towing your vehicle with the front axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 310).
Towing the vehicle with both axles onthe ground
G WARNINGThe power assistance for the steering and thebrake force booster do not work when theengine is not running. You will then needmuch more effort to brake and steer the vehi-cle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towing with the hazard warning lampsswitched on, use the combination switch asusual. In this case, only the turn signals forthe desired direction flash. When you resetthe combination switch, the hazard warn-ing lamps start flashing again.
312 Towing and tow-startingBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
Vehicles with automatic transmission: theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto position P when you open the driver's orfront-passenger door or when you remove thekey from the ignition lock. In order to ensurethat the automatic transmission stays in posi-tion N when towing the vehicle, you mustobserve the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
Vehicles with manual transmission:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Engage neutral.
Vehicles with manual or automatic trans-mission:X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition
lock.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 108).It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 310).
Transporting the vehicle! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components. Oth-erwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to neutral.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.
X Move the transmission to position N.
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.X Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reverse gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.X Secure the vehicle.The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can beused to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-porter if you wish to transport it.
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,the transmission may be damaged.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only be eithertowed away with both axles on the ground orbe loaded up and transported.If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-ported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical systemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 308).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.
Towing and tow-starting 313
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)
! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatictransmission. You could otherwise damagethe automatic transmission.
Before tow-starting, the following conditionsmust be fulfilled:Rthe battery is connected.Rthe engine has cooled down.Rthe exhaust system has cooled down.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 108).X Fit the towing eye (Y page 311).X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
rope.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it
depressed.X Engage neutral.X Release the brake pedal.X Tow-start the vehicle.X Engage second gear.X Release the clutch pedal slowly without
depressing the accelerator pedal.The engine is started.
X Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neu-tral.
X Stop at a suitable place.X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric
parking brake.X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.X Remove the towing eye (Y page 312).X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.When tow-starting, it is important that youobserve the safety instructions (Y page 310)and the legal requirements for the relevantcountries.
Electrical fuses
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you manipulate, bridge or replace a faultyfuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, theelectric cables could be overloaded. This mayresult in a fire. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Always replace faulty fuses with specified newfuses of the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Only use fuses marked with an"S". Components or systems could other-wise be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to disconnectfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions willfail.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognise bythe colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratingsare listed in the fuse allocation chart.If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.
Before replacing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 162).X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it (Y page 143). All indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster mustbe off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRfuse box in the front-passenger footwell
314 Electrical fusesBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe front-passenger footwell (Y page 315).
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G WARNINGWhen the bonnet is open, and the windscreenwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before opening the bonnet.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.
X Open the bonnet.X Remove any existing moisture from the
fuse box using a dry cloth.X To open: open clamps ;.X Fold cover : up in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
X To close: check whether the seal is lyingcorrectly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the back into openings= on the fuse box.
X Fold down cover :.X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and
close.X Close the bonnet.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well
X To open: remove the floormat from thefront-passenger side.
X Fold out perforated floor covering : in thedirection of the arrow.
Electrical fuses 315
Brea
kdow
n as
sist
ance
Z
X To release cover =, press retainingclamp ;.
X Fold out cover = in the direction of thearrow to the catch.
X Remove cover = forwards.
i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on thelower right-hand side of cover =.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-handside of the fuse box into the retainer.Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lockaudibly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
316 Electrical fusesBr
eakd
own
assi
stan
ce
Useful information ............................ 318Important safety notes .................... 318Operation ........................................... 318Winter operation ............................... 320Tyre pressure .................................... 321Changing a wheel ............................. 324Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 329Emergency spare wheel ................... 332
317
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tyres with thosethat fulfil the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to fit thecorrect:RdesignationRtypeWhen replacing tyres, make sure to fit thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRtype
G WARNINGA flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tyres without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tyre.Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyres with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyreswith run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are notbeing used correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and enquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on dimensions and types ofwheels and tyres for your vehicle can befound (Y page 329).Information on air pressure for the tyres onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler
flapRunder "Tyre pressure"Modification work on the brake system andwheels is not permitted. The use of wheelspacers or brake dust shields is not permit-ted. This invalidates the general operatingpermit for the vehicle.
i Further information on wheels and tyrescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.
Operation
Information on drivingRCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle
is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteris-tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.If you suspect that a tyre is defective,reduce your speed immediately. Stop thevehicle as soon as possible to check the
318 OperationW
heel
s an
d ty
res
wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyredamage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find nosigns of damage, have the wheels and tyreschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tyres do not get deformed by the kerbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva-tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.
Regular checking of wheels and tyres
G WARNINGDamaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose controlof your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tyres regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tyres immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tyres of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftyre pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tyresRpuncturesRtears in the tyresRbulges on tyresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tyre tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tyre (Y page 319). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tyre surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fitanything onto the valve other than the stand-ard valve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not fit anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pres-sure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres,particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyrepressure as necessary (Y page 321).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 332).The service life of tyres depends on variousfactors, including the following:Rdriving styleRtyre pressureRtyre mileage
Tyre tread
G WARNINGInsufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac-tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipatewater. This means that on wet road surfaces,the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particularwhere speed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tyres.Minimum tyre tread depth for:Rsummer tyres: 3 mmRM+S tyres: 4 mmFor safety reasons, replace the tyres beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtyre tread depth is reached..
Selecting, fitting and replacing tyresROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type
and make.Exception: it is permissible to fit a differenttype or make in the event of a flat tyre.Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres withrun-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 300).ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
wheels.
Operation 319
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds forthe first 100 km. They only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
tread depth. This otherwise significantlyreduces the traction on wet roads (aqua-planing).RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear.Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 332).
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics)
With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tyres.MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-junction with an active tyre pressure losswarning system and only on wheels specifi-cally tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres witha flat tyre (Y page 300).
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kitif you fit tyres that do not feature run-flatcharacteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFITkit can be obtained from a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 324).
Driving with summer tyresAt temperatures below +7 †, summer tyreslose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tyres on your vehi-cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at verycold temperatures could cause tears to form,thereby damaging the tyres permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibilityfor this type of damage.
M+S tyres
G WARNINGM+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as theydo not provide sufficient traction. There is arisk of accident.M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than4 mm must be replaced.
At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyresor all-season tyres. Both types of tyre areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tyres will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tyres havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.Use M+S tyres of the same make and treadon all wheels to maintain safe handling char-acteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tyres you havefitted.If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi-mum permissible speed than that of the vehi-cle, affix an appropriate warning sign in thedriver's field of vision. This can be obtainedat a qualified specialist workshop.Under these circumstances, you should alsorestrict the maximum speed of the vehicleusing permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it
320 Winter operationW
heel
s an
d ty
res
does not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed for the M+S tyres(Y page 172).When you have fitted the M+S tyres:X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 321).X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Y page 323).For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 332).
Snow chains
G WARNINGIf snow chains are fitted to the rear wheels,they may scrape against the vehicle body orchassis components. This could cause dam-age to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a riskof an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever fit snow chains on the rear wheelsRalways fit snow chains in pairs to the front
wheels.
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fitsnow chains on steel wheels, you may dam-age the hub caps. Remove the hub capsfrom the relevant wheels before fitting thesnow chains.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre-sponding standard of quality.If you intend to fit snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-
tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyrecombinations (Y page 329).Ronly use snow chains when the road sur-
face is completely snow-covered. Removethe snow chains as soon as possible whenyou come to a road that is not snow-cov-ered.
Rlocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to fit snow chains.Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 km/h.Rwhen snow chains are fitted, never use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 186).
i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 65) when pulling away withsnow chains fitted. This way you can allowthe wheels to spin in a controlled manner,achieving an increased driving force (cut-ting action).
Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 332).
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure specifications
G WARNINGTyres with too low or too high tyre pressurecontain the following hazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at highspeeds.Rthe tyres can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tyretraction.Rthe driving, steering and braking character-
istics may be severely impaired.There is a risk of accident.Follow recommended tyre inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tyres includ-ing the spare wheel:Rat least every two weeksRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-
road drivingIf necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
Tyre pressure 321
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyrevalves, the tyre valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tyre pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. Thiscan also result in tyre pressure loss. There isa risk of accident.Only screw standard valve caps or valve capsspecifically provided by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tyre valve.
G WARNINGIf the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyrepressure that is too low may result in a tyreblow-out. There is a risk of accident.RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.
H Environmental noteCheck the tyre pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.
You will find a table of tyre pressures for var-ious operating conditions on the inside ofyour vehicle's fuel filler flap.Operation with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 332).Operation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tyres is the maximum tyrepressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.The table inside the fuel filler flap may statetyre pressures for different load conditions.These are defined in the table as differentnumbers of passengers and amounts of lug-gage. The actual number of seats may vary;for more information, please refer to the vehi-cle's registration documents.If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pres-sures stated on the tyre pressure information
label apply for all tyres approved for this vehi-cle.
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, thefollowing tyre pressure information is onlyvalid for that tyre size.Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tyre pressure.If possible, only correct tyre pressures whenthe tyres are cold.The tyres are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1.6 kmDepending on the ambient temperature, thespeed at which you are driving and the loadon the tyres, the tyre temperature and thusthe tyre pressure change by approximately10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take thisinto account when checking the pressure ofwarm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure ifit is too low for the current operating condi-tions.Driving with tyre pressure that is too high ortoo low can:Rshorten the service life of the tyresRcause increased tyre damageRhave a negative effect on handling charac-
teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g.aquaplaning)
322 Tyre pressureW
heel
s an
d ty
res
i The tyre pressure values given for lowloads are minimum values which offer yougood ride comfort characteristics.However, you can also use the values givenfor higher loads. These are permissible andwill not adversely affect the running of thevehicle.
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Important safety notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settyre pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.The tyre pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tyrepressure (Y page 321).The tyre pressure loss warning system doesnot replace the need to regularly check yourvehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss ofpressure on several tyres at the same timecannot be detected by the tyre pressure losswarning system.The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering manoeuvres.The function of the tyre pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
tyres.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-
nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tyre pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tyre pressureRchanged the wheels or tyresRfitted new wheels or tyresX Before restarting, make sure that the tyre
pressures are set properly on all four tyresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tyre pressures can befound in the table on the fuel filler flap.The tyre pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tyre pressure. If an incorrecttyre pressure is set, these incorrect valueswill be monitored.
X Observe the notes on tyre pressure(Y page 321).
X Make sure that the key is in posi-tion 2(Y page 143) in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Service menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to selectTyre pressure.
X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in themultifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.
The Tyre press. now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to selectYes.
X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.
Tyre pressure 323
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressureloss warning system will monitor the settyre pressures of all four tyres.
orIf you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.orX If the Tyre press. now OK? message
appears, use the 9 or : button toselect Cancel.
X Press the a button.The tyre pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.
Changing a wheel
Flat tyreYou can find information on what to do in theevent of flat tyre in the "Flat tyre" section(Y page 300). You will also find informationon driving with MOExtended tyres in the eventof a flat tyre.Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emer-gency spare wheel is fitted according to thedescription under "Fitting a wheel"(Y page 325).
Interchanging the wheels
G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tyres have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Interchange front and rear wheels only if thewheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels ofdiffering dimensions can render the generaloperating permit invalid.
Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 324).The wear patterns on the front and rear tyresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Interchange the wheels before a clear wearpattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyrestypically wear more on the shoulders and therear tyres in the centre.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can interchange the wheelsevery 5,000km to 10,000 km depending onthe degree of tyre wear. Maintain the direc-tion of tyre rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,if necessary, restart the tyre pressure losswarning system.
Direction of rotationTyres with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicatesits correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel.
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNINGThe water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-ers) can cause damage not visible from theoutside to tyres or chassis components. Com-ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
324 Changing a wheelW
heel
s an
d ty
res
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-aged tyres or chassis components replacedimmediately.
Fitting a wheel
Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.X Apply the electric parking brake manually
(Y page 163).X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.X Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reverse gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncou-
ple it.X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tyre-change tool kit from thevehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.
i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For information on whichtools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Necessary wheel-changing tools caninclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRWheel wrench
Securing the vehicle against rollingaway
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit(Y page 299).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards :.X Fold out lower plate ;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.
Changing a wheel 325
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack isused incorrectly, it could tip over while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suitable for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brakeand positioning wheel chocks. Neverrelease the parking brake while the vehicleis raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tyres and the ground doesnot exceed 3 cm.Rnever place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Steel wheel with wheel trimX Vehicles with steel wheels: carefully
reach into two of the wheel trim openingsand remove the wheel trim.
Vehicles with hub caps: the hub cap coversthe wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew thewheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap.
326 Changing a wheelW
heel
s an
d ty
res
X To remove: turn the centre cover of hubcap : anti-clockwise and remove.
X To fit: before fitting, ensure that hubcap : is in the open position. To do so,turn the centre cover anti-clockwise.
X Put hub cap : in position and turn thecentre cover clockwise until you feel andhear hub cap : engage.
X Make sure that hub cap : is fittedsecurely.
X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.
The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel arches and just in front of the rearwheel arches (arrows).
Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equip-ment)
AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehicle has covers fitted nextto the jacking points on the outer sills to pro-tect the vehicle body.X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
equipment: fold cover ; upwards.X Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the
tyre-changing tool kit and place it on thehexagon nut of the jack so that the lettersAUF are visible.
Changing a wheel 327
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
X Position jack ? at jacking point =.
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-tioned vertically under the jacking point.
X Turn ratchet ring spanner A until jack ?sits completely on jacking point = and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet ring spanner A until the tyreis raised a maximum of 3 cm from theground.
Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheelhubs could otherwise be damaged whenthe bolts are tightened.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.
Fitting a new wheel
G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notices in "Changing a wheel"(Y page 324).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.
328 Changing a wheelW
heel
s an
d ty
res
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.
X Place the ratchet ring spanner onto thehexagon nut of the jack so that the lettersAB are visible.
X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehi-cle is once again standing firmly on theground.
X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated(: to A). The tightening torque must be130 Nm.
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the vehicle again.X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the
cover into the outer sill.X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted
wheel and adjust accordingly.Observe the recommended tyre pressure(Y page 321).
Wheel and tyre combinations
General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you only use tyres andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These are specially adapted to the controlsystems, such as ABS or ESP® and aremarked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen-sion variations could cause the tyres tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tyres or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tyres,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Further information about wheels, tyresand approved combinations can beobtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always be detec-ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do notfit used tyres if you have no informationabout their previous usage.
Wheel and tyre combinations 329
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
! Large wheels: the lower the section widthfor a certain wheel size, the lower the ridecomfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll com-fort and suspension comfort are reducedand the risk of damage to the wheels andtyres as a result of driving over obstaclesincreases.
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tyre tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleYou will find a table with recommended tyrepressures for various operating conditions onthe inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Forfurther information on tyre pressure, see(Y page 321). Check tyre pressures regularlyand only when the tyres are cold.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fitthe vehicle:Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
(left/right)Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtendedtyres)Exception: it is permissible to fit a differenttype or make in the event of a flat tyre.Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres withrun-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 300).
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you addition-ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if youfit tyres that do not feature run-flat charac-teristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit canbe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.
In the following table, the wheel/tyre combi-nations are allocated to the vehicle modelsthrough variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:
V1 A 18012
V2 A 180 CDI12
V3 A 20012, A 220 CDI12
V4 A 200 CDI12
V5 A 25012
V6 A 250 Sport
V7 A 45 AMG 4MATIC
i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can befitted at the factory in all countries.
12 BlueEFFICIENCY
330 Wheel and tyre combinationsW
heel
s an
d ty
res
Tyres
Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
BA 195/65 R15 91 T 6.5 J x 15 H2 ET 47 — # — — — — —
BA 195/65 R15 91 H13 6.5 J x 15 H2 ET 47 # — — — — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 H 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 # # — # — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 V14 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 # # # # — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 VMOExtended14, 15
6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 # # # # — — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 V14, 16 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 # # # # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 WMOExtended14, 15, 16
7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 # # # # # — —
BA 225/40 R18 92 W XLMOExtended14, 15, 16, 17
7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 # # # # # — —
BA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL16 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 — — — — — # #
BA 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL16 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 48 — — — — — — #
Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
BA 195/65 R15 91 TM+Si13
6.5 J x 15 H2 ET 47 # # — — — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 HM+Si14
6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 # # # # — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 HM+SiMOExtended14, 15
6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 # # # # — — —
BA 205/50 R17 93 H XLM+Si
6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 # # # # # # —
BA 205/50 R17 93 H XLM+SiMOExtended14, 15
6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 # # # # # # —
13 A 180 BlueEFFICIENCY: only for vehicles with 15" tyres fitted at the factory.14 A 250 BlueEFFICIENCY: not in conjunction with Sports Edition package (code P84).15 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pres-
sure loss warning system.16 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.17 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section.
Wheel and tyre combinations 331
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
BA 215/45 R18 93 V XLM+Si
7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 42 — — — — — — #
BA 235/40 R18 95 V XLM+Si16
8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 — — — — — — #
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre typeof the spare wheel/emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit-ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheelmay severely impair the driving characteris-tics. There is a risk of accident.To prevent hazardous situations:RAdapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer-
gency spare wheel if the dimesions are dif-ferent to those of the wheel being replaced.ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare
wheel briefly if the dimesions are differentto those of the wheel being replaced.RDo not switch off ESP®.RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare
wheel in question replaced at the nearestqualified specialist workshop. Make surethat the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyretype are correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.Snow chains must not be fitted to emergencyspare wheels.
General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-essary (Y page 321). The value on the wheelor as given in the "Technical data" section(Y page 329) is valid.
i When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure losswarning system cannot function reliably.Only restart the tyre pressure loss warningsystem when the defective wheel has beenreplaced with a new wheel.
An emergency spare wheel may also be fittedagainst the direction of rotation. Observe thetime restriction on use as well as the speedlimitation specified on the emergency sparewheel.Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
16 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
332 Emergency spare wheelW
heel
s an
d ty
res
X Open the tailgate.X Loosen lashing straps ; on emergency
spare wheel bag :.X Remove emergency spare wheel bag :
with the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel.
For further information on changing and fit-ting a wheel, see (Y page 325).
Technical data
"Minispare" emer-gency spare wheel
Tyres Steel wheel
T 125/80 R17 99 MTyre pressure: 420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)
3.5 B x 17 H2ET 19.5
Emergency spare wheel 333
Whe
els
and
tyre
s
Z
334
Useful information ............................ 336Information on technical data ......... 336Vehicle electronics ........................... 336Identification plates ......................... 338Service products and capacities ..... 338Vehicle data ...................................... 346Trailer tow hitch ................................ 34824 GHz radar sensor system (coun-try overview) ..................................... 350
335
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Information on technical data
You can find technical data on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.com
i The technical data was determined inaccordance with EC Directives. All dataapplies to the vehicle's standard equip-ment. It may therefore differ for vehicleswith optional equipment. You can obtainfurther information from a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electron-ics
! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, suchas control units, sensors and connectorleads, at a qualified specialist workshop.Vehicle components may otherwise wearmore quickly and the vehicle's operatingpermit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)
G WARNINGIf RF transmitters are tampered with or notproperly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radi-
ation they emit can interfere with the vehicleelectronics. This may jeopardise the opera-tional safety of the vehicle. There is a risk ofan accident.You should have all work on electrical andelectronic components carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.
G WARNINGIf you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle inan improper way, its electromagnetic radia-tion can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if:Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an
exterior aerialRthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is
not a low-reflection aerialThis can jeopardise the operating safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted ata qualified specialist workshop. When oper-ating in the vehicle, always connect the RFtransmitter to the low-reflection exterior aer-ial.
! The operating permit may be invalidatedif the instructions for installation and use ofRF transmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditions mustbe complied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible out-
put in these wavebands.Ronly approved aerial positions may be
used.Observe the notes on operating mobilephones (Y page 279).The following aerial positions may be used forthe correct installation of RF transmitters:
336 Vehicle electronicsTe
chni
cal d
ata
Approved aerial positions: Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear wing
i On vehicles with panorama sliding sun-roof, fitting an aerial to the front roof areais not permitted.On the rear wing, it is recommended thatyou position the aerial on the side of thevehicle closest to the centre of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fittingaftermarket radio frequency transmittingequipment") when retrofitting RF (radio fre-quency) transmitters. Comply with the legalrequirements for add-on parts.If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or aerialconnections intended for use with the basicwiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer'sadditional instructions when installing.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or aerial positionsmust be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) atthe base of the aerial must not exceed thefollowing values:
Waveband Maximum transmission
output
Short wave3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband68 - 87.5 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz
35 W
70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz
35 W
GSM/DCS/PCS850/900/1800/1900
10 W
UMTS/LTE 10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle with-out restrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mWRmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/
LTE)There are no restrictions when positioning theaerial on the outside of the vehicle for the fol-lowing wavebands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandRGSM/DCS/PCSRUMTS/LTE
Vehicle electronics 337
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)
X Open the front right-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate: Vehicle identification plate; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG)= EU type approval number (only for certain
countries)? VINA Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight (kg)B Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/
trailer combination (kg)C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)E Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is example data. This data is dif-ferent for every vehicle and can deviatefrom the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehi-cle's identification plate.
VIN
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.
X Fold up floor covering : in front of theright-hand front seat.You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 338).
Engine numberThe engine number is stamped onto thecrankcase. More information can be obtainedfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Service products and capacities
Important safety notes
G WARNINGService product can be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Observe the instructions on the respectiveoriginal container when using, storing and dis-posing off service products. Always storeservice products in the sealed original con-tainer. Always keep service products out ofthe reach of children.
338 Service products and capacitiesTe
chni
cal d
ata
H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally-responsible manner.
Service products include the following:RFuels (e.g. petrol, diesel)RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindscreen washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use products tested and approved byMercedes-Benz. They are listed in thisMercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appro-priate section.You can identify service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tions on the container:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Further information can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre or on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Fuel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefuelling.
G WARNINGFuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a danger of injury.Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuelvapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-dren.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin
with water and soap immediately.RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water immediately. Seekimmediate medical attention.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-
cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.RChange any clothing that has come into
contact with fuel immediately.
Tank capacityThe total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,depending on the vehicle equipment.
Model Total capa-city
A 180 BlueEFFICIENCY, manual transmissionA 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, manual trans-mission
40 lor
50.0 l
Models with 4MATIC 56.0 l
All other models 50.0 l
Model Of whichreserve fuel
AMG vehicles Approx.8.0 l
All other models Approx.6.0 l
Service products and capacities 339
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1)
Fuel grade (AMG vehicles)! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol
with at least 98 RON/88 MON that con-forms to European standard EN 228 or anequivalent specification.You can otherwise impair engine output ordamage the engine.
! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with anoctane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may beused as a temporary measure if the recom-mended fuel is not available. This mayreduce engine performance and increasefuel consumption. As much as possible,avoid driving at full throttle.
! Regular unleaded petrol with an octanerating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also beused as a temporary measure if the recom-mended fuel is not available.Doing so results in noticeably higher fuelconsumption, and the engine power outputis noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at fullthrottle.If only regular unleaded petrol with anoctane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON orlower is available, you must have the vehi-cle adapted to this fuel at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10fuel.
Fuel grade (except AMG vehicles)! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrongfuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys-tem. Even small amounts of the wrong fuelcould result in damage to the fuel systemand the engine. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.
! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea-ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ,that conforms to European standardEN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalentspecification.Fuel of this specification can contain up to10 % ethanol.Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 orE DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wearand damage the engine and exhaust sys-tem.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.
! Do not use the following:RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol)RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol)RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RPetrol with additives containing metalRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. Petrol must only be mixedwith additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain fur-ther information from any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.
Usually you will find information about thefuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-tion staff.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10fuel.
i A 200 BlueEFFICIENCY, A 250 BlueEF-FICIENCY: as a temporary measure, if the
340 Service products and capacitiesTe
chni
cal d
ata
recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use unleaded petrol with anoctane rating of 93 RON/83 MON.All other models: as a temporary meas-ure, if the recommended fuel is not availa-ble, you may also use unleaded petrol withan octane rating of 91 RON/82 MON. Thismay reduce engine performance andincrease fuel consumption. Avoid driving atfull throttle and sudden acceleration. Neverrefuel using fuel with a lower RON/MON.
i In some countries, the available petrolmay not be sufficiently low in sulphur. Thisfuel can temporarily produce unpleasantodours, especially on short journeys. Assoon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odoursare reduced.
Information on refuelling (Y page 159).
Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additives
can cause wear in the fuel high-pressurepump and contaminate the entire fuel sys-tem. The repair costs are high. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue build-up. Petrol mustonly be mixed with additives recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. More information aboutrecommended additives can be obtainedfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
One of the major problems with low-gradefuel is the creation of carbon deposits duringthe process of burning fuel. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you use fuel brands thathave additives.If you use fuels without these additives for alonger period of time, there may be a build-upof carbon deposits. These will form especiallyon the inlet valves and in the combustionchamber.This could lead to engine running problems,e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idle
Rengine noiseRmisfiringRloss of powerIn areas where petrol with the required addi-tives is not available, carbon deposits canbuild up. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends the use of additives that have beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles; seehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up as a result. In such cases, and inconsultation with a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre, the petrol may be mixed with theadditive recommended by Mercedes-Benz(part no. A000989254512). You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre toview a list of approved products. Observe theinstructions for use in the product descrip-tion.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.
Diesel (EN 590)
Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,components in the exhaust system may over-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol todiesel fuel.
! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel thatconforms to the European standard EN 590or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that doesnot conform to EN 590 can lead toincreased wear as well as damage to theengine and exhaust system.
Service products and capacities 341
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
! Do not use the following:Rmarine dieselRheating oilRbio-dieselRvegetable oilRpetrolRparaffinRkeroseneDo not mix such fuels with diesel fuel anddo not use any special additives. This canotherwise lead to engine damage.
! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: incountries outside the EU, only refuel withlow-sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur con-tent under 50 ppm; otherwise the emissioncontrol system could be damaged.
! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-ter: in countries where only diesel fuel witha high sulphur content is available, you willneed to carry out your vehicle's oil changeat shorter intervals. More informationabout the interval for oil change can beobtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.
Usually you will find information about thefuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-tion staff.Information on refuelling (Y page 159).
Low outside temperaturesIn winter months, diesel fuel with an improvedcold flow quality is available. In Europe, theEN 590 standard defines various climate-dependent temperature categories. Malfunc-tions can be avoided by refuelling with dieselfuel that corresponds to the climatic specifi-cations outlined in EN 590. At unusually lowoutside temperatures, it is possible that theflow characteristics of the diesel fuel could beinsufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel fromwarmer areas may not be suitable for opera-tion in colder climatic conditions.
i Further information on country-specificfuel properties can be obtained from oilcompanies, e.g. at filling stations.
Fuel consumption information
H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-
ronmental influences or road conditionsYou can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual inthe following situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin urban trafficRon short journeysRin mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailer
i Only for certain countries: you can findthe current consumption and emission val-ues of your vehicle in the COC documents(EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). Thesedocuments are delivered with your vehicle.The consumption figures were in each casebased on the currently applicable version:Rfor vehicles that comply with standards
up to and including the EURO 4 standard,in accordance with EU Directive80/1268/EECRfor vehicles that comply with or exceed
the EURO 5 standard, in accordance withRegulation (EC) No. 715/2007
Deviations from these values may occurunder normal operating conditions.
342 Service products and capacitiesTe
chni
cal d
ata
Engine oil
General notesWhen handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 338).The quality of the engine oil is decisive for thefunction and service life of an engine. Afterextensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approvesengine oils that correspond to the currenttechnical standard.Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approvedengine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benzengines.Further information on tested and approvedengine oils can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oilchange carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on theoil container by the inscription "MB Approval"and the corresponding designation, e.g. MBApproval 229.51.You can call up an overview of approvedengine oils on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter-ing the designation, e.g. 229.5.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.Missing values were not available at the timeof going to print.
Petrol engines MB Approval
All models 229.5
Diesel engines with adiesel particle filter
MB Approval
A 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, manual trans-mission
A 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, automatic transmissionA 200 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCYA 220 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY
228.51,229.31, 229.51
Diesel engines withouta diesel particle filter
MB Approval
A 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, manual trans-mission
A 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, automatic transmissionA 200 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCYA 220 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY
228.3, 228.5,228.51, 229.3,229.31, 229.5,
229.51
i If the engine oils listed in the table are notavailable, you may add the following engineoils until the next oil change:Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB
Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB
Approval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 orACEA C3
This may only be added once and theamount must not be greater than 1.0 l.
CapacitiesThe following values refer to an oil change,including the oil filter.
Service products and capacities 343
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
Model Replacementamount
A 180 BlueEFFICIENCYA 200 BlueEFFICIENCY
5.8 l
A 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.6 l
A 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, manual trans-mission
4.5 l
A 180 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY, automatic transmissionA 200 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCYA 220 CDI BlueEFFI-CIENCY
7.0 l
A 45 AMG 4MATIC 5.5 l
Additives! Do not use any additives with the engine
oil. This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosityrating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity,the faster it flows.Engine oil selection is based on the respectiveoutside temperatures and in accordance withthe SAE classification (viscosity). The tableshows you which SAE classifications are to beused. The low-temperature properties of
engine oils can be significantly impaired dur-ing operation due to, for example, ageing orsoot and fuel accretion. It is thereforestrongly recommended to observe regular oilchanges using an approved engine oil with theappropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
G WARNINGThe brake fluid continuously absorbs mois-ture from the air. This results in the boilingpoint of the brake fluid lowering. If the boilingpoint of the brake fluid is too low, vapourpockets may form when the brakes are sub-jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak-ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-bed intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 338).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Service Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet at:http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you top upthe antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze isnot spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
344 Service products and capacitiesTe
chni
cal d
ata
clean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter-net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.
! The engine cooling system is filled withcoolant, which must be renewed after15 years or after 250,000 kilometres at thelatest.
When handling coolant, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 338).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Ranti-corrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present inthe correct concentration, the boiling point ofthe coolant during operation will be approx-imately 130 †.The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down toapproximately -37 †.Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not bedissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up withequal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-rosion inhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.The coolant is checked at every maintenanceinterval at a qualified specialist workshop.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.
Windscreen washer system and head-lamp cleaning system
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWindscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windscreen washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.
! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water inthe washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit andWinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, thespraying nozzles could become blocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 338).
Service products and capacities 345
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit.
Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-ature.RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to
2 parts water.RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to
1 part water.RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit
to 1 part water.
i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.
Vehicle data
General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:- tyres- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRitems of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the maximumpayload. The unladen weight is specified inaccordance with EC directives andincludes:- driver (68 kg)- luggage (7 kg)- all fluids (fuel tank 90% full)
Rvehicle-specific weight information can befound on the vehicle identification plate(Y page 338).Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehi-
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu-ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY)These documents are delivered with yourvehicle.
Dimensions and weights
Model :
Maxi-mumhead-room
;
Openingheight
A 180 BlueEFFI-CIENCYA 180 CDI Blue-EFFICIENCY
1856 mm 1975 mm
A 200 BlueEFFI-CIENCYA 200 CDI Blue-EFFICIENCYA 220 CDI Blue-EFFICIENCY
1857 mm 1976 mm
A 250 BlueEFFI-CIENCY
1861 mm 1980 mm
A 45 AMG 4MATIC
1840 mm 1959 mm
346 Vehicle dataTe
chni
cal d
ata
Missing values were not available at the timeof going to print.
All models (except AMG vehicles)
Vehicle length 4292 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors
2022 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors
1780 mm
Wheelbase 2699 mm
Maximum roof load 100 kg
Maximum boot load 100 kg
A 180 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height 1433 mm
Unladen weight, manual transmis-sion
1370 kg
Unladen weight, automatic transmis-sion
1395 kg
A 200 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height 1434 mm
Unladen weight, manual transmis-sion
1370 kg
Unladen weight, automatic transmis-sion
1395 kg
A 250 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height 1438 mm
Unladen weight 1445 kg
A 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height 1433 mm
Unladen weight, manual transmis-sion
1395 kg
Unladen weight, automatic transmis-sion
1475 kg
A 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height 1434 mm
Unladen weight, manual transmis-sion
1445 kg
Unladen weight, automatic transmis-sion
1475 kg
A 220 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height 1434 mm
Unladen weight
AMG vehicles
Vehicle length 4395 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors
2022 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors
1780 mm
Vehicle height 1417 mm
Wheelbase 2699 mm
Roof load 100 kg
Maximum boot load 100 kg
Vehicle data 347
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the engine cooling system maybe necessary, depending on the vehicletype.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chas-sis.
Trailer towing is not permissible on the fol-lowing models:RA 45 AMG 4MATICRVehicles with the AMG Sports package
Example: anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch: Anchorage points; Overhang dimension= Rear axle centre line
For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, theoverhang dimension including protective cov-ering is 794 mm.
348 Trailer tow hitchTe
chni
cal d
ata
Trailer loads
Vehicles with manual transmission! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight.
Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload.
Permissible trailer load,
braked18
Permissible trailer load,
braked19
Permissible trailer load,
unbraked
Maximum drawbar
nose-weight20
Permissible rear axle
load when towing a
trailer
A 18021 1500 kg 1200 kg 685 kg 75 kg 985 kg
A 20021 1500 kg 1400 kg 685 kg 75 kg 980 kg
A 180 CDI21 1500 kg 1200 kg 695 kg 75 kg 980 kg
A 200 CDI21 1500 kg 1500 kg 720 kg 75 kg 975 kg
The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be foundon the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ballcoupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ballcoupling.
Vehicles with automatic transmission! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight.
Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload.
Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models:RA 45 AMG 4MATICRVehicles with the AMG Sports package
18 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8% from a standstill.19 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.20 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.21 BlueEFFICIENCY
Trailer tow hitch 349
Tech
nica
l dat
a
Z
Permissible trailer load,
braked18
Permissible trailer load,
braked19
Permissible trailer load,
unbraked
Maximum drawbar
nose-weight20
Permissible rear axle
load when towing a
trailer
A 18021 1500 kg 1200 kg 695 kg 75 kg 955 kg
A 20021 1500 kg 1400 kg 695 kg 75 kg 950 kg
A 25021 1500 kg 1500 kg 720 kg 75 kg 960 kg
A 180 CDI21 1500 kg 1200 kg 735 kg 75 kg 950 kg
A 200 CDI21 1500 kg 1500 kg 735 kg 75 kg 950 kg
A 220 CDI21 1500 kg 1500 kg 740 kg 75 kg 950 kg
The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be foundon the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ballcoupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ballcoupling.
24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview)
The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. When you aredriving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivatethe system using the on-board computer (Y page 223).The current country overview can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or onthe Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung.Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automaticallynear radio telescope facilities. A display message appears in the multifunction display to tellyou that the radar sensor system is being switched off (Y page 246).If Blind Spot Assist is active, it will be deactivated automatically (Y page 219).If deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor systemusing the on-board computer (Y page 223). Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radarsensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility(Y page 223).
18 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8% from a standstill.19 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.20 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.21 BlueEFFICIENCY
350 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview)Te
chni
cal d
ata
351
352
Publication detailsInternet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mercedes-benz.comhttp://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOwner's Manual to the technical documenta-tion team at the following address:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.
As at 13.12.2012
Order no. 65155008 02 Part no. 1765841400Z102 Edition NA 2012-09d
É1765841400Z102iËÍ1765841400Z102
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only